Proposal for a European Parliament and Council Directive amending Council Directive 88/77/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the measures to be taken against the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants from diesel engines for use in vehicles
8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/1 II (Preparatory Acts) COMMISSION Proposal for a European Parliament and Council Directive amending Council Directive 88/77/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the measures to be taken against the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants from diesel engines for use in vehicles (98/C 173/01) (Text with EEA relevance) COM(97) 627 final — 97/0350 (COD) (Submitted by the Commission on 23 March 1998) THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION, additional efforts to be made for a considerable reduction in the present level of emissions of pollutants from motor vehicles; Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 100a thereof, Having regard to the proposal from the Commission, Having regard to the opinion of the Economic and Social Committee, Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 189b of the Treaty, Whereas the first programme of action of the European the environment (1), Community on protection of approved by a Council Declaration of 22 November 1973, called for account to be taken of the latest scientific advances in combating atmospheric pollution caused by gases emitted from motor vehicles and for directives adopted previously to be amended accordingly; whereas the fifth programme of action, which in its general approach was approved by the Council in its Resolution of 1 February 1993 (2), provides for it Whereas is recognised that the development of transport in the Community has entailed significant constraints for the environment; whereas a certain number of official estimates of the increase in traffic density have proved to be lower than the official figures; whereas for that reason stringent emission standards should be laid down for all motor vehicles; Whereas Council Directive 88/77/EEC (3), as last amended by European Parliament and Council Directive 96/1 EC (4) laid down the limit values for the emissions of carbon monoxide, unburnt hydrocarbons and nitrogen oxides from diesel engines for use in motor vehicles on the basis of a test procedure for European driving conditions for the vehicles concerned; whereas that Directive was first amended by Directive 91/542/EEC (5) in two stages, the first stage (1992/93) coinciding with the implementation dates of the new European emission standards for passenger cars; whereas the second stage (1995/96) established a longer-term orientation for the (1) OJ C 112, 20. 12. 1973, p. 1. (2) OJ C 138, 17. 5. 1993, p. 1. (3) OJ L 36, 9. 2. 1988, p. 33. (4) OJ L 40, 17. 2. 1996, p. 1. (5) OJ L 295, 25. 10. 1991, p. 1. C 173/2 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 European motor industry by fixing limit values based on the expected performance of technologies still under development, whilst allowing to industry a lead time to perfect such technologies; whereas Directive 88/77/EEC, as amended by Directive 96/1/EC, required that for small diesel engines with a cylinder swept volume lower than 0,7 dm3 and a rated power speed higher than 3 000 min-1, the limit value for particulate emissions set in Directive 91/542/EEC be introduced instead from 1999; whereas, however, it is reasonable on a technical basis to maintain a differential on particulate emissions for these small high-speed diesel engines after 1999; Whereas under Article 5(3) of Directive 91/542/EEC, the Commission was to report to the Council before the end of 1996 on progress made regarding the revision of the limit values if necessary, with a revision of the test procedure; whereas such revised limits were not to apply before 1 October 1999 as regards new type-approvals; for polluting emissions combined, Whereas the Commission set out, in its communication to the European Parliament and the Council (1), a European programme on air quality, road traffic emissions, fuels and engine technologies, the Auto-Oil Programme, with a view to fulfilling the requirements of Article 4 of European Parliament and Council Directive 94/12/EC (2); whereas a cost/effectiveness study within the Auto-Oil Programme has shown that a further improvement of diesel-engine technology for heavy-duty vehicles was necessary with a view to achieving air the quality communication the by Auto-Oil-Programme; the year 2010 as described the Commission on in in Whereas improvement of requirements for new diesel engines in Directive 88/77/EEC constitute a part of a global Community strategy which will also include a revision of standards for light commercial vehicles and passenger cars from the year 2000, an improvement in motor fuels and more accurate assessment of in-use vehicle emission performances; European Parliament and of the Council (4), whereas in accordance with the principle of proportionality as set out in the third paragraph of Article 3b of the Treaty, the measures provided for in this Directive do not go beyond what is necessary to achieve the objective of reducing the level of pollutant emissions from motor vehicles; Whereas reductions in emission limits applicable from the year 2000, of 30 % in oxides of nitrogen(NOx) and 30 % particulate matter, have been identified by the Auto-Oil Programme as key measures to achieving medium-term air quality; whereas reductions in emission limits of 30 % total hydrocarbons, 30 % carbon monoxide will similarly yield medium-term air quality benefits; whereas a reduction of 30 % in exhaust smoke opacity over that measured on current engine types and complementing Council Directive 72/306/EEC (5), as last amended by Commission Directive 97/20/EC (6), will contribute to the reduction of particulate matter; whereas these reductions will take into account the effect on emissions of new test the driving patterns represent that better cycles experienced by vehicles in use; Whereas on-board diagnostics (OBD) are not fully developed for heavy-duty vehicles and should be introduced from 2005 with a view to permitting rapid detection of failure of components and systems having a critical effect on vehicle emissions and thus allowing a initial significant upgrading of the maintenance of emissions performances on through improved inspection and maintenance; in-use vehicles Whereas new type-approval test cycles for gaseous and particulate emissions and smoke opacity should be introduced that will allow a more representative evaluation of the emissions performance of diesel engines in test conditions that more closely resemble those encountered by vehicles in use; whereas a new test cycle should be introduced for conventional diesel engines and those diesel engines fitted with catalysts; whereas a new combined should be introduced for diesel engines fitted with advanced emission control systems and gas-fuelled engines; test procedure (two cycle) Whereas Directive 88/77/EEC is one of the separate directives under the type-approval procedure laid down by Council Directive 70/156/EEC of 6 February 1970 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to type-approval of motor vehicle and their trailers (3), as last amended by Directive 97/27/EC of the Whereas Member States should be allowed to encourage, by means of tax incentives, the introduction of vehicles which satisfy the higher requirements introduced by this Directive; (1) COM(96) 248 final, 18. 6. 1996. (2) OJ L 100, 19. 4. 1994, p. 42. (3) OJ L 42, 23. 2. 1970, p. 1. (4) OJ L 233, 25. 8. 1997, p. 1. (5) OJ L 190, 20. 8. 1972, p. 1. (6) OJ L 125, 16. 5. 1997, p. 21. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/3 it that to establish is necessary Whereas further substantial reductions in emission limit values that take into account the results of the Commission’s Auto-Oil II Programme are envisaged from 2005, to encourage the continued development of vehicles fitted with the most advanced anti-pollution equipment; whereas, unless substantial progress is made towards a worldwide harmonised test procedure, emission limits for diesel engines for 2005 should apply to the combined (two cycle) test procedure; Whereas in the development of Community legislation concerning emissions from motor vehicles, results of ongoing research on the characteristics of particulates should be taken into account; Whereas the Commission should report by 31 December 1999 on the evolution of emission control equipment for heavy-duty diesel vehicles and the relationship with fuel quality; whereas the Commission should also report on the evolution of friendly emission limits for engines using fuels such as liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) and natural gas (NG); specific environmentally Whereas the emission limits envisaged for 2005 and the applicable test procedure should be confirmed by a directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on the basis of a proposal, to be made by the Commission not later than 31 December 1999; Whereas Directive 88/77/EEC should be amended accordingly, — “vehicle” means any vehicle as defined in Annex II Section A to Directive 70/156/EEC propelled by a diesel or gas engine, with the exception of vehicles of category M1. the motive — “diesel or gas engine” means propulsion for which source of a vehicle type-approval, as a separate technical unit as defined in Article 2 of Directive 70/156/EEC, can be granted. ’ 3. Annexes I to VIII are replaced by the Annex to this Directive. Article 2 1. With effect from 1 October 1999, no Member State may, on grounds relating to the gaseous and particulate pollutants and opacity of smoke emissions from an engine: — refuse to grant EC type-approval, or to issue the document provided for in Article 10 of Directive Directive 70/156/EEC, 87/403/EEC (1), or to grant national type-approval for a type of vehicle propelled by a diesel or gas engine, or amended by as — prohibit the registration, sale, entry into service or use of such new vehicles, or — refuse to grant EC type-approval for a given type of diesel or gas engine, or HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE: — prohibit the sale or use of new diesel or gas engines, Article 1 if the appropriate requirements of the Annexes to Directive 88/77/EEC, as amended by this Directive, are satisfied. Directive 88/77/EEC is hereby amended as follows: 1. The title is replaced by the following: ‘Council Directive 88/77/EEC of 3 December 1987 on the measures to be taken against the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants from diesel engines for use in vehicles, and the emission of gaseous pollutants from positive ignition engines fuelled with natural gas or liquefied petroleum gas for use in vehicles’ 2. Article 1 is replaced by the following: ‘Article 1 2. With effect from 1 October 2000, Member States: — may no longer grant EC type-approval or issue the document provided for in the last indent of Article 10 of Directive 70/156/EEC, as amended by Directive 87/403/EEC, and — shall refuse national type-approval, for types of diesel or gas engines and types of vehicle propelled by a diesel or gas engine where the emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants and opacity of smoke from the engine do not comply with the limit values set out in the Tables in section 6. 2. 1. of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC, as amended by this Directive. For the purposes of this Directive: (1) OJ L 220, 8. 8. 1987, p. 44. C 173/4 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 3. With effect from 1 October 2001, Member States shall: the date of the entry into force of this Directive, but in any event no later than 31 December 1999. — consider certificates of conformity which accompany new vehicles or new engines pursuant to Directive 70/156/EEC to be no longer valid for the purpose of Article 7(1) of that Directive, and — prohibit the registration, sale, entry into service and use of new vehicles propelled by a diesel or gas engine and the sale and use of new diesel or gas engines, where the emissions of gaseous and particulate pollutants and opacity of smoke from the engine do not comply with the limit values set out in the Tables in section 6. 2. 1. of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC, as amended by this Directive. Article 3 Member States may make provision for tax incentives only in respect of motor vehicles which comply with Directive 88/77/EEC, as amended by this Directive. Such incentives shall meet the provisions of the Treaty and also the following conditions: — they shall apply to all new vehicles offered for sale on the market of a Member State which comply in advance with the applicable mandatory limit values set out in row A of Tables 1 and 2 in Section 6. 2. 1. of Annex I to Directive 88/77/EEC, as amended by this Directive; — they shall be terminated with effect from the mandatory application of the emission limit values laid down in Article 2(3) for new vehicles; — for each type of vehicle, they shall be of an amount lower than the additional cost of the technical solutions introduced to ensure compliance with the values set in Article 2(3), and of their installation on the vehicle. The Commission shall be informed in sufficient time of plans to institute or change the tax incentives referred to in the first paragraph, so that its observations. it can submit Article 4 The proposal shall take account of: — the review programme detailed in Article 3 of Directive. and Article 9 of Directive. ; — the development of diesel engine and gas engine emission control technology, regard being had to the interdependence of fuel quality; technology with such — the development of a worldwide harmonised test cycle for type-approval testing; — on-board diagnostic (OBD) systems for heavy-duty engines; — relevant durability provisions. shall aim at achieving substantial The proposal reductions of pollutant emissions as regards the vehicles and engines covered by this Directive. The reduced limit values shall not apply before 1 October 2005 for new type-approvals. Article 5 1. Member States shall bring into force the laws, regulations and administrative provisions necessary to comply with this Directive before 1 January 1999. They shall forthwith inform the Commission thereof. When Member States adopt these provisions, these shall contain a reference to this Directive or shall be accompanied by such reference at the time of their official publication. The procedure for such reference shall be adopted by Member States. 2. Member States shall communicate to the Commission the texts of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive. Article 6 This Directive shall enter into force on the 20th day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Communities. The Commission the European shall propose Parliament and the Council a further tightening of the emission standards of vehicles or engines falling within the scope of this Directive no later than 12 months after to Article 7 This Directive is addressed to the Member States. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/5 ANNEX CONTENTS SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS. ANNEX I 1. Scope. 2. Definitions and abbreviations. 3. Application for EC type-approval. 4. EC type-approval. 5. Engine markings. 6. Specifications and tests. 7. Installation on the vehicle. 8. Engine family. 9. Production conformity. Appendix 1 Procedure of production conformity testing when standard deviation is satisfactory. Appendix 2 Procedure of production conformity testing when standard deviation is unsatisfactory or unavailable. Appendix 3 Procedure of production conformity testing at manufacturers request. Page 8 8 8 13 14 17 18 19 19 21 24 26 28 ANNEX II INFORMATION DOCUMENT. 30 Appendix 1 Essential characteristics of the (parent) engine and information concerning the conduct of test. 1. Description of engine. 2. Measures taken against air pollution. 3. Fuel feed. 4. Valve timing. 5. Ignition system (spark ignition engines only). 6. Engine-driven equipment. 7. Additional information on test conditions. 8. Engine performance. Appendix 2 Essential characteristics of the engine family. 1. Common parameters. 2. Engine family listing. Appendix 3 Essential characteristics of the engine type within the family. 1. Description of engine. 2. Measures taken against air pollution. 3. Fuel feed. 4. Valve timing. 5. Ignition system (spark ignition engines only). Appendix 4 Characteristics of the engine-related vehicle parts. ANNEX III TEST PROCEDURE. 1. Introduction. 2. Test conditions. Appendix 1 ESC and ELR test cycles. 1. Engine and dynamometer settings. 2. ESC test run. 3. ELR test run. 4. Calculation of the gaseous emissions. 31 31 32 33 36 36 36 37 38 40 40 40 42 42 43 44 47 47 48 49 49 50 52 52 53 55 57 C 173/6 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 5. Calculation of the particulate emission. 6. Calculation of the smoke values. Appendix 2 ETC test cycle. 1. Engine mapping procedure. 2. Generation of the reference test cycle. 3. Emissions test run. 4. Calculation of the gaseous emissions. 5. Calculation of the particulate emission (diesel engines only) Appendix 3 ETC dynamometer schedule. Appendix 4 Measurement and sampling procedures. 1. Introduction. 2. Dynamometer and test cell equipment. 3. Determination of the gaseous components. 4. Determination of the particulates. 5. Determination of smoke. Appendix 5 Calibration procedure. 1. Calibration of the analytical instruments. 2. Calibration of the CVS-system. 3. Calibration of the particulate measuring system. 4. Calibration of the smoke measurement equipment. ANNEX IV TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF REFERENCE FUEL PRESCRIBED FOR APPROVAL TESTS AND TO VERIFY CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION. 1. Diesel fuel. 2. Natural gas (NG). 3. Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG). ANNEX V ANALYTICAL AND SAMPLING SYSTEMS. 1. Determination of the gaseous emissions. 2. Exhaust gas dilution and determination of the particulates. 3. Determination of smoke. Page 60 62 64 64 64 65 69 73 75 85 85 85 86 88 90 92 92 98 100 101 102 102 103 104 105 105 112 127 ANNEX VI EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE. 131 ANNEX VII EXAMPLE OF CALCULATION PROCEDURE. 133 INDEX OF FIGURES Figure 1 Specific definitions of the test cycles. Figure 2 Schematic of production conformity testing. Figure 3 Sequence of ELR test. Figure 4 Interpolation of NOx control point. Figure 5 ETC dynamometer schedule. Figure 6 Schematic of NO2 converter efficiency device. Figure 7 Flow diagram of raw exhaust gas analysis system for CO, CO2, NOx, HC. Figure 8 Flow diagram of diluted exhaust gas analysis system for CO, CO2, NOx, HC. Figure 9 Flow diagram for methane analysis (GC method). Figure 10 Flow diagram for methane analysis with the non-methane cutter (NMC). 10 23 56 59 84 95 105 106 109 111 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/7 Page Figure 11 Partial flow dilution system with isokinetic probe and fractional sampling (SB control) 113 Figure 12 Partial flow dilution system with isokinetic probe and fractional sampling (PB control) 113 Figure 13 Partial flow dilution system with CO2 or NOx concentration measurement and fractional sampling. Figure 14 Partial flow dilution system with CO2 concentration measurement, carbon balance and total sampling. Figure 15 Partial flow dilution system with single venturi, concentration measurement and fractional sampling. Figure 16 Partial flow dilution system with twin venturi or twin orifice, concentration measurement and fractional sampling. Figure 17 Partial flow dilution system with multiple tube splitting, concentration measurement and fractional sampling. Figure 18 Partial flow dilution system with flow control and total sampling. Figure 19 Partial flow dilution system with flow control and fractional sampling. Figure 20 Full flow dilution system. Figure 21 Particulate sampling system. Figure 22 Double dilution system (full flow system only). Figure 23 Full flow opacimeter. Figure 24 Partial flow opacimeter. INDEX OF TABLES Table 1 Limit values for diesel engines — ESC and ELR tests. Table 2 Limit values for diesel and gas engines — ETC test. Table 3 Pass and fail decision numbers of Appendix 1 sampling plan. Table 4 Pass and fail decision numbers of Appendix 2 sampling plan. Table 5 Pass and fail decision numbers of Appendix 3 sampling plan. Table 6 Regression line tolerances. Table 7 Permitted point deletions from regression analysis. Table 8 Accuracy of measuring instruments. Table 9 Recommended filter loadings. 114 114 115 116 117 118 118 122 125 125 128 129 18 19 25 27 29 68 69 85 89 C 173/8 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 ANNEX I SCOPE, DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS, APPLICATION FOR EC-TYPE-APPROVAL, SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTS AND CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION 1. SCOPE This Directive applies to the gaseous and particulate pollutants from all motor vehicles equipped with compression-ignition engines and to the gaseous pollutants from all motor vehicles equipped with positive ignition engines fuelled with natural gas or LPG, and to compression-ignition and positive ignition engines as specified in Article 1 with the exception of those vehicles of category N1, N2 and M2 for which type-approval has been granted under Directive 70/220/EEC (1), as last amended by Directive 96/44/EC (2). 2. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS For the purposes of this Directive: 2. 1. 2. 2. ‘test cycle’ means a sequence of test points each with a defined speed and torque to be followed by the engine under steady state (ESC test) or transient operating conditions (ETC, ELR test); ‘approval of an engine (engine family)’ means the approval of an engine type (engine family) with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants; 2. 3. ‘diesel engine’ means an engine which works on the compression-ignition principle; ‘gas engine’ means an engine which is fuelled with natural gas (NG) or LPG; 2. 4. 2. 5. 2. 6. 2. 7. ‘engine type’ means a category of engines which do not differ in such essential respect as engine characteristics as defined in Annex II to this Directive; ‘engine family’ means a manufacturer’s grouping of engines which, through their design as defined in Annex II, Appendix 2 to this Directive, are expected to have similar exhaust emission characteristics: all members of the family must comply with the applicable emission limit values; ‘parent engine’ means an engine selected from an engine family in such a way that its emissions characteristics will be representative for that engine family; ‘gaseous pollutants’ means carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons (assuming a ratio of CH1,85 for diesel, CH2,525 for LPG and CH2,93 for NG (NMHC)), methane (assuming a ration of CH4 for NG) and oxides of nitrogen, the last named being expressed in nitrogen dioxide (NO2) equivalent; ‘particulate pollutants’ means any material collected on a specified filter medium after diluting the exhaust with clean filtered air so that the temperature does not exceed 325 K (52°C); 2. 8. ‘smoke’ means particles suspended in the exhaust stream of a diesel engine which absorb, reflect, or refract light; (1) OJ L 76, 6. 4. 1970, p. 1. (2) OJ L 210, 20. 8. 1996, p. 25. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/9 2. 9. ‘net power’ means the power in EC kW obtained on the test bench at the end of the crankshaft, or its equivalenz, measured in accordance with the EC method of measuring power as set out in Directive 80/1269/EC (1), as last amended by Directive 89/491/EEC (2); 2. 10. ‘declared maximum power (Pmax)’ means the maximum power in EC kW (net power) as declared by the manufacturer in his application for type-approval; 2. 11. ‘per cent load’ means the fraction of the maximum available torque at an engine speed; 2. 12. 2. 13. 2. 14. 2. 15. 2. 16. 2. 17. 2. 18. 2. 19. 2. 20. 2. 21. 2. 22. ‘ESC test’ means a test cycle consisting of 13 steady state modes to be applied in accordance with Section 6. 2 of this Annex; ‘ELR test’ means a test cycle consisting of a sequence of load steps at constant engine speeds to be applied in accordance with Section 6. 2 of this Annex; ‘ETC test’ means a test cycle consisting of 1800 second-by-second transient modes to be applied in accordance with Section 6. 2 of this Annex; ‘engine operating speed range’ means the engine speed range, most frequently used during engine field operation, which lies between the low and high speeds, as set out in Annex III to this Directive; ‘low speed (nloo)’ means the lowest engine speed where 50 % of the declared maximum power occurs; ‘high speed (nhi)’ means the highest engine speed where 70 % of the declared maximum power occurs; ‘engine speeds A, B and C’ means the test speeds within the engine opeating speed range to be used for the ESC test and the ELR test, as set out in Annex III, Apendix 1 to this Directive; ‘control area’ means the area between the engine speeds A and C and between 25 to 100 per cent load; ‘reference speed (nref)’ means the 100 per cent speed value to be used for denormalising the relative speed values of the ETC test, as set out in Annex III, Appendix 2 to this Directive; ‘opacimeter’ means an instrument designed to measure the opacity of smoke particles by means of the light extinction principle; ‘NG gas range’ means one of the H or L range as defined in European Standard EN 437, dated Novemer 1993; 2. 23. ‘self adaptability’ means any engine device allowing the air/fuel ratio to be kept constant; 2. 24. 2. 25. 2. 26 ‘recalibration’ means a fine tuning of an NG engine in order to provide the same performance (power, fuel consumption) in a different range of natural gas; ‘Wobbe Index (lower Wl; or upper Wu)’ means the ratio of the corresponding calorific value of a gas per unit volume and the square root of its relative density under the same reference conditions: W = Hgas × ˛ρ air / ρ gas ‘λ-shift factor (Sλ)’ means an expression that describes the required flexibility of the engine management system regarding a change of the excess-air ration λ if the engine is fuelled with a gas composition different from pure methane (see Annex VII for the calculation of Sλ). (1) OJ L 375, 31. 12. 1980, p. 46. (2) OJ L 238, 15. 8. 1989, p. 43. C 173/10 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Figure 1 Specific definitions of the test cycles Net power (% of net Pmax) 100 80 60 40 20 0 Idle 50 % of Pmax Control area Pmax 70 % of Pmax nlo A B Engine speed C nref nhi 2. 27. Symbols and abbreviations 2. 27. 1. Symbols for test parameters Symbol Unit Term AP AT CEE CEM C1 conc D0 DF D E EZ fa fc FFH FS GAIRW GAIRD GDILW GEDFW GEXHW GFUEL m² m² — — — Cross-sectional area of the isokinetic sampling probe Cross-sectional area of the exhaust pipe Ethane efficiency Methane efficiency Carbon 1 equivalent hydrocarbon ppm/Vol% Subscript denoting concentration m³/s Intercept of PDP calibration function — — — Dilution factor Bessel function constant Bessel function constant g/kWh Interpolated NOx emission of the control point — s−1 — — kg/h kg/h kg/h kg/h kg/h kg/h Laboratory atmospheric factor Bessel filter cut-off frequency Fuel specific factor for the calculation of wet concentration from dry concentration Stoichiometric factor Intake air mass flow rate on wet basis Intake air mass flow rate on dry basis Dilution air mass flow rate on wet basis Equivalent diluted exhaust gas mass flow rate on wet basis Exhaust gas mass flow rate on wet basis Fuel mass flow rate 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/11 Symbol Unit Term GTOTW kg/h Diluted exhaust gas mass flow rate on wet basis H HREF Ha Hd MJ/m³ Calorific value g/kg g/kg g/kg Reference value of absolute humidity (10,71 g/kg) Absolute humidity of the intake air Absolute humidity of the dilution air HTCRAT mol/mol Hydrogen-to-carbon ratio i K k KH,D KH,G KV KW,a KW,d KW,e KW,r L La m mass MDIL Md Mf Mf,p Mf,b MSEC MSEC MTOTW MTOTW,i — — m−1 — — — — — — % m Subscript denoting an individual mode Bessel constant Light absorption coefficient Humidity correction factor for NOx for diesel engines Humidity correction factor for NOx for gas engines CFV calibration function Dry to wet correction factor for the intake air Dry to wet correction factor for the dilution air Dry to wet correction factor for the diluted exhaust gas Dry to wet correction factor for the raw exhaust gas Percent torque related to the maximum torque for the test engine speed Effective optical path length Slope of PDP calibration function g/h or g Subscript denoting emissions mass flow (rate) kg mg mg mg mg kg kg kg kg Mass of the dilution air sample passed through the particulate sampling filters Particulate sample mass of the dilution air collected Particulate sample mass collected Particulate sample mass collected on primary filter Particulate sample mass collected on back-up filter Mass of the diluted exhaust sample passed through the particulate sampling filters Mass of secondary dilution air Total CVS mass over the cycle on wet basis Instantaneous CVS mass on wet basis C 173/12 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Symbol Unit Term N NP NP,i n np nhi nlo nref pa PA pB pd ps p1 P(a) P(b) P(n) P(m) Ω Qs q r Ra Rd Rf ρ S Si Sλ T Ta t te tf tp ∆t ∆ti ô % — — min−1 s−1 min−1 min−1 min−1 kPa kPa kPa kPa kPa kPa kW kW kW kW — m³/s — — % % — Opacity Total revolutions of PDP over the cycle Revolutions of PDP during a time interval Engine speed PDP speed High engine speed Low engine speed Reference engine speed for ETC test Saturation vapour pressure of the engine intake air Absolute pressure Total atmospheric pressure Saturation vapour pressure of the dilution air Dry atmospheric pressure Pressure depression at pump inlet Power absorbed by auxiliaries to be fitted for test Power absorbed by auxiliaries to be removed for test Net power non-corrected Power measured on test bed Bessel constant CVS volume flow rate Dilution ratio Ratio of cross sectional areas of isokinetic probe and exhaust pipe Relative humidity of the intake air Relative humidity of the dilution air FID response factor kg/m³ density kW m−1 — K K s s s s s s Dynamometer setting Instantaneous smoke value λ-shift factor Absolute temperature Absolute temperature of the intake air Measuring time Electrical response time Filter response time for Bessel function Physical response time Time interval between successive smoke data (= l/sampling rate) Time interval for instantaneous CFV flow % Smoke transmittance 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/13 Symbol Unit Term V0 W Wact Wref WF WFE X0 Yi m³/rev — kWh kWh — — m³/rev m−1 PDP volume flow rate at actual conditions Wobbe index Actual cycle work of ETC Reference cycle work of ETC Weighting factor Effective weighting factor Calibration function of PDP volume flow rate 1 s Bessel averaged smoke value 2. 27. 2. Symbols for the chemical components Methane Ethane Propane Carbon monoxide Di-octylphtalate Carbon dioxide Hydrocarbons CH4 C2H6 C3H8 CO DOP CO2 HC NMHC Non-methane hydrocarbons NOx Oxides of nitrogen Nitric oxide NO NO2 Nitrogen dioxide Particulates PT 2. 27. 3. Abbreviations Critical flow venturi Chemiluminescent detector European load response test European steady state cycle European transient cycle Flame ionisation detector Gas chromatograph CFV CLD ELR ESC ETC FID GC HCLD Heated chemiluminescent detector Heated flame ionisation detector HFID LPG Liquefied petroleum gas NDIR Non-dispersive infrared analyser NG Natural gas NMC Non-methane cutter 3. APPLICATION FOR EC TYPE-APPROVAL 3. 1. Application for EC type-approval for a type of engine family as a separate technical unit 3. 1. 1. The application for approval of an engine type or engine family with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants for diesel engines and with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous pollutants for gas engines shall be submitted by the engine manufacturer or by a duly accredited representative. 3. 1. 2. It shall be accompanied by the undermentioned documents in triplicate and the following particulars: 3. 1. 2. 1. a description of the engine type or engine family, if applicable, comprising the particulars referred to in Annex II to this Directive which conform to the requirements of Article 9a of Directive 70/156/EEC. C 173/14 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 3. 1. 3. An engine conforming to the ‘engine type’ or ‘parent engine’ characteristics described in Annex II shall be submitted to the technical service responsible for conducting the approval tests defined in Section 6. 3. 2. Application for EC type-approval for a vehicle type in respect of its engine 3. 2. 1. 3. 2. 2. 3. 2. 2. 1. The application for approval of a vehicle with regard to emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants by its diesel engine or engine family and with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous pollutants by its gas engine or engine family shall be submitted by the vehicle manufacturer or a duly accredited representative. It shall be accompanied by the undermentioned documents in triplicate and the following particulars: a description of the vehicle type, of the engine-related vehicle parts and of the engine type or engine family, if applicable, comprising the particulars referred to in Annex II, along with the documentation required in application of Article 3 of Directive 70/156/EEC. 3. 3. Application for EC type-approval for a vehicle type with an approved engine 3. 3. 1. 3. 3. 2. 3. 3. 2. 1. The application for approval of a vehicle with regard to emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants by its approved diesel engine or engine family and with regard to the level of the emission of gaseous pollutants by its approved gas engine or engine family shall be submitted by the vehicle manufacturer or a duly accredited representative. It shall be accompanied by the undermentioned documents in triplicate and the following particulars: a description of the vehicle type and of engine-related vehicle parts comprising the particulars referred to in Annex II, as applicable, and a copy of the EC type-approval certificate (Annex VI) for the engine or engine family, if applicable, as a separate technical unit which is installed in the vehicle type, along with the documentation required in application of Article 3 of Directive 70/156/EEC. 4. EC TYPE-APPROVAL 4. 1. Granting of a universal fuel EC type-approval 4. 1. 1. 4. 1. 2. A universal fuel EC type-approval is granted subject to the following requirements: in the case of diesel fuel the parent engine meets the requirements of this Directive on the reference fuel specified in Annex IV. in the case of natural gas the parent engine should demonstrate its capability to adapt to any fuel composition that may occur across the market. In the case of natural gas there are generally two type of fuel, high calorific fuel (H-gas) and low calorific fuel (L-gas), but with a significant spread within both ranges; they differ significantly in their energy content expressed by the Wobbe index and in their λ-shift factor (Sλ). The formulae for the calculation of the Wobbe index and Sλ are given in Sections 2. 25 and 2. 26. The composition of the reference fuels reflects the variations of those parameters. The parent engine shall meet the requirements of this Directive on the reference fuels G20 and G25, as specified in Annex IV, without any readjustment to the fuelling between the two tests. However, one adaptation run over one ETC cycle without measurement is permitted after the change of the fuel. Before testing, the parent engine shall be run-in using the procedure given in paragraph 3 of Appendix 2 to Annex III. 4. 1. 3. In the case of an engine fuelled with natural gas which is self-adaptive for the range of H-gases on the one hand and the range of L-gases on the other hand, and which switches between the H-range and the L-range by means of a switch, the parent engine shall be tested on the two relevant reference fuels as specified in Annex IV for each range, at each position of the switch. The fuels are G24 (fuel 1) and G23 (fuel 2) for the H-range of gases. G 23 (fuel 1) and G25 (fuel 2) for the L-range of gases. The parent engine shall meet the 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/15 requirements of this Directive at both positions of the switch without any readjustment to the fuelling between the two tests at each position of the switch. However, one adaptation run over one ETC cycle without measurement is permitted after the change of the fuel. Before testing, the parent engine shall be run-in using the procedure given in paragraph 3 of Appendix 2 to Annex III. 4. 1. 3. 1. On the manufacturer’s request, the engine may be tested on a third fuel (fuel 3) of the λ-shift factor (Sλ)lies between those of the fuels G20 and G25, for example, when fuel 3 is a market fuel. The results of this test may be used as a basis for the evaluation of the conformity of the production. 4. 1. 3. 2. The ratio of emission results ‘r’ shall be determined for each pollutant as follows: r = emission result on reference fuel 2 emission result on reference fuel 1 or, ra = emission result on reference fuel 2 emission result on reference fuel 3 and, rb = emission result on reference fuel 1 emission result on reference fuel 3 4. 1. 4. In the case of LPG the parent engine should demonstrate its capability to adapt to any fuel composition that may occur across the market. In the case of LPG there are variations in C3/C4 composition. These variations are reflected in the reference fuels. The parent engine should meet the emission requirements on the reference fuels A and B as specified in annex IV without any readjustment to the fuelling between the two tests. Before testing the parent engine shall be run-in using the procedure defined in paragraph 3 of Appendix 2 to Annex III. 4. 1. 4. 1. The ratio of emission results ‘r’ shall be determined for each pollutant as follows: r = emission result on reference fuel 2 emission result on reference fuel 1 4. 2. Granting of a fuel range restricted EC type-approval At the present state of technology it is not yet possible to make leanburn natural gas engines self-adaptive. Yet these engines offer an advantage in efficiency and CO2 emission. If a user has the guarantee of a supply of fuel of uniform composition, he may opt for a leanburn engine. Such an engine could be given a fuel restricted approval. In the interest of international harmonisation it is regarded desirable that a specimen of such an engine is granted international approval. Fuel restricted variants would then need to be identical except for the contents of the database of the ECU of the fuelling system, as such parts of the fuelling system (such as injector nozzles) that need to be adapted to the different fuel flow. Fuel range restricted EC type-approval is granted subject to the following requirements: 4. 2. 1. Exhaust emissions approval of an engine running on natural gas and laid out for operation on either the range of H-gases or on the range of L-gases The parent engine shall be tested on the two relevant reference fuels as specified in Annex VI for the relevant range. The fuels are G20 (fuel 1) and G23 (fuel 2) for the H-range of gases. G23 (fuel 1) and G25 (fuel 2) for the L-range of gases. The parent engine shall meet the emission requirements without any readjustment to the fuelling between the two tests. However, one adaptation run over one ETC cycle without measurement is permitted after the change of the fuel. Before testing the parent engine shall be run-in using the procedure defined in paragraph 3 of Appendix 2 to Annex III. C 173/16 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 4. 2. 1. 1. On the manufacturer’s request it may be tested on a third fuel (fuel 3) of the λ-shift factor (Sλ) lies between those of the fuels G20 and G23, or G23 and G25 respectively, e. g. when fuel 3 is a market fuel. The results of this test may be used as a basis for the evaluation of the conformity of the production. 4. 2. 1. 2. The ratio of emission results ‘r’ shall be determined for each pollutant as follows: emission result on reference fuel 2 emission result on reference fuel 1 emission result on reference fuel 2 emission result on reference fuel 3 r = or, ra = and, rb = emission result on reference fuel 1 emission result on reference fuel 3 4. 2. 1. 3. Upon delivery to the customer the engine shall bear a label (see paragraph 5. 1. 5) stating for which range of gases the engine is approved. 4. 2. 2. Exhaust emissions approval of an engine running on natural gas or LPG and laid out for operation on one specific fuel composition 4. 2. 2. 1. The parent engine shall meet the emission requirements on the reference fuels G20 and G25 in the case of natural gas, or the reference fuels A and B in the case of LPG, as specified in Annex IV. Between the tests fine-tuning of the fuelling system is allowed. This fine-tuning will consist of a recalibration of the fuelling database, without any alteration to either the basic control strategy or the basic structure of the database. If necessary the exchange of parts that are directly related to the amount of fuel flow (such as injector nozzles) is allowed. The engine will have to deliver the same power on both fuels. 4. 2. 2. 2. If the manufacturer so desires the engine may be tested on the reference fuels G20 and G23, or G23 and G25, in which case the type approval is only valid for the H-range or the L-range of gases respectively. 4. 2. 2. 3. Upon delivery to the customer the engine shall bear a label (see paragraph 5. 1. 5) stating for which fuel composition the engine has been calibrated. 4. 3. Exhaust emissions approval of a member of a family 4. 3. 1. With the exception of the case mentioned in paragraph 4. 3. 2 the approval of a parent engine shall be extended to all family members without further testing, for any fuel composition within the range for which the parent engine has been approved (in the case of engines described in paragraph 4. 2. 2) or the same range of fuels (in the case of engines described in either paragraphs 4. 1 or 4. 2) for which the parent engine has been approved. 4. 3. 2. Secondary test engine In case of an application for type approval of an engine, or a vehicle in respect of its engine, that engine belonging to an engine family, if the approval authority determines that, with regard to the selected parent engine the submitted application does not fully represent the engine family defined in Annex I. Appendix 1, an alternative and if necessary an additional reference test engine may be selected by the approval authority and tested. 4. 4. Type-approval certificate A certificate conforming to the model specified in Annex VI shall be issued for approval referred to under Sections 3. 1, 3. 2 and 3. 3. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/17 5. ENGINE MARKINGS 5. 1. The engine approved as a technical unit must bear: 5. 1. 1. the trademark or trade name of the manufacturer of the engine; 5. 1. 2. the manufacturer’s commercial description; 5. 1. 3. 5. 1. 4. the EC type-approval number preceded by the distinctive letter(s) or number(s) of the country granting EC type-approval (1). In case of an NG engine one of the following markings to be placed after the EC type-approval number: — H in case of the engine being approved and calibrated for the H-range of gases; — L in case of the engine being approved and calibrated for the L-range of gases; — HL in case of the engine being approved and calibrated for both the H-range and L-range of gases; — Ht in case of the engine being approved and calibrated for a specific gas composition in the H-range of gases and transformable to another specific gas in the H-range of gases by fine tuning of the engine fuelling; — Lt in case of the engine being approved and calibrated for a specific gas composition in the L-range of gases and transformable to another specific gas in the L-range of gases after fine tuning of the engine fuelling; — HLt in the case of the engine being approved and calibrated for a specific gas composition in either the H-range or the L-range of gases and transformable to another specific gas in either the H-range or the L-range of gases by fine tuning of the engine fuelling. 5. 1. 5. Labels In the case of NG and LPG fuelled engines with a fuel range restricted type-approval, the following labels are applicable: 5. 1. 5. 1. C o n t e n t The following information must be given: In the case of paragraph 4. 2. 1. 2, the label shall state ‘ONLY FOR USE WITH NATURAL GAS RANGE H’. If applicable, ‘H’ is replaced by ‘L’. In the case of paragraph 4. 2. 2. 3, the label shall state ‘ONLY FOR USE WITH NATURAL GAS SPECIFICATION. ’ or ‘ONLY FOR USE WITH LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS SPECIFICATION. ’, as applicable. All the information in the appropriate table(s) in Annex VI shall be given with the individual constituents and limits specified by the engine manufacturer. The letters and figures must be at least 4 mm in height. 5. 1. 5. 2. P r o p e r t i e s Labels must be durable for the useful life of the engine. Labels must be clearly legible and their letters and figures must be indelible. Additionally, labels must be attached in such a manner that their fixing is durable for the useful life of the engine, and the labels cannot be removed without destroying or defacing them. 5. 1. 5. 3. P l a c i n g Labels must be secured to an engine part necessary for normal engine operation and not normally requiring replacement during engine life. Additionally, these labels must be located so as to be readily visible to the average person after the engine has been completed with all the auxiliaries necessary for engine operation. 5. 2. In case an application for EC type-approval for a vehicle type in respect of its engine, the marking specified in Section 5. 1. 5 shall also be places close to fuel filling aperture. (1) 1 = Germany, 2 = France, 3 = Italy, 4 = Netherlands, 5 = Sweden, 6 = Belgium, 9 = Spain, 11 = United Kingdom, 12 = Austria, 3 = Luxembourg, 16 = Norway, 17 = Finland, 18 = Denmark, 21 = Portugal, 23 = Greece, FL = Liechtenstein, IS = Iceland, IRL = Ireland. C 173/18 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 5. 3. In case of an application for EC type-approval for a vehicle type with an approved engine, the marking specified in Section 5. 1. 5 shall also be placed close to the fuel filling aperture. 6. SPECIFICATIONS AND TESTS 6. 1. General The components liable to affect the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants from diesel engines and the emission of gaseous pollutants from gas engines shall be so designed, constructed and assembled as to enable the engine, in normal use, to comply with the provisions of this Directive. 6. 2. Specifications concerning the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants and smoke /or oxidation catalysts. Diesel engines The emissions shall be determined on the ESC and ELR tests with conventional diesel engines including those fitted with electronic fuel injection equipment, exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) and fitted with advanced exhaust after-treatment systems including de NOx catalysts and/or particulate traps, shall additionally be tested on the ETC test. For gas engines, the gaseous emissions shall be determined on the ETC test; the particulate emission is not subject to testing. The ESC and ELR test procedures are described in Annex III, Appendix 1, the ETC test procedure in Annex III, Appendices 2 and 3. The emissions of gaseous pollutants and particulate pollutants, if applicable, and smoke, if applicable, by the engine submitted for testing shall be measured by the methods described in Annex III, Appendix 4, Annex V describes the recommended analytical systems for the gaseous pollutants, the recommended particulate sampling systems, and the recommended smoke measurement system. For NG fuelled gas engines, the methane emission shall be reported, but is not subject to limitation. Other systems or analysers may be approved by the Technical Service if it is found that they yield equivalent results on the respective test cycle. The determination of system equivalency shall be based upon a seven sample pair (or larger) correlation study between the system under consideration and one of the reference systems of this Directive. For particulate emissions only the full flow dilution system is recognised as the reference system. ‘Results’ refer to the specific cycle emissions value. The correlation testing shall be performed at the same laboratory, test cell, and on the same engine, and is preferred to be run concurrently. The equivalency criterion is defined as a ± 5 % agreement of the sample pair averages. For introduction of a new system into the Directive the determination of equivalency shall be based upon the calculation of repeatability and reproducibility, as described in ISO 5725. 6. 2. 1. Limit values D i e s e l e n g i n e s The specific masses of the carbon monoxide, of the hydrocarbons, of the oxides of nitrogen and of the particulates, as determined on the ESC test, and of the smoke opacity, as determined on the ELR test, shall not exceed the amounts shown in table 1. Table 1 Limit values for diesel engines ESC — and ELR tests Mass of carbon monoxide (CO) g/kWh Mass of hydrocarbons (HC) g/kWh Mass of nitrogen oxides (NOx) g/kWh Mass of particulates (PT) g/kWh Smoke m−1 2,1 0,66 5,0 0,10 0,13 (1) 0,8 Date A 2000 (1) For engines having a swept volume of less than 0,7 dm3 per cylinder and a rated power speed of more than 3 000 min−1. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/19 D i e s e l a n d g a s e n g i n e s For diesel engines that are additionally tested on the ETC test, and specifically for gas engines, the specific masses of the carbon monoxide, of the non-methane hydrocarbons, of the methane (where applicable), of the oxides of nitrogen and of the particulates (where applicable) shall not exceed the amounts shown in Table 2. Table 2 Limit values for diesel and gas engines — ETC Test Mass of carbon monoxide (CO) g/kWh Mass of non-methane hydrocarbons (NMHC) g/kWh Mass of methane (CH4) (1) g/kWh Mass of nitrogen oxides Mass of particulates (NOx) g/kWh (PT) (2) g/kWh 5,45 0,78 1,6 5,0 0,16 0,21 (3) Date A 2000 (1) For NG engines only. (2) For diesel engines only. (3) For engines having a swept volume of less than 0,7 dm3 per cylinder and a rated power speed of more than 3 000 min−1. 6. 2. 2. Hydrocarbon measurement for diesel and gas-fuelled engines 6. 2. 2. 1. A manufacturer may choose to measure the mass of hydrocarbons on the ETC test instead of measuring the mass of non-methane hydrocarbons. In this case, the limit for the mass of hydrocarbons is the same as shown in Table 2 for the mass of non-methane hydrocarbons. 6. 2. 3. Specific requirements for diesel engines 6. 2. 3. 1. 6. 2. 3. 2. The specific mass of the oxides of nitrogen measured at the random check points within the control area of the ESC test must not exceed by more than 10 % the values interpolated from the adjacent test modes. The smoke value on the random test speed of the ELR must not exceed the highest smoke value of the two adjacent test speeds by more than 20 %, or by more than 5 % of the limit value, whichever is greater. 7. INSTALLATION ON THE VEHICLE 7. 1. The engine installation on the vehicle shall comply with the following characteristics in respect to the type-approval of the engine: 7. 1. 1. intake depression shall not exceed that specified for the type-approved engine in Annex VI; 7. 1. 2. 7. 1. 3. 7. 1. 4. exhaust back pressure shall not exceed that specified for the type-approved engine in Annex VI; exhaust system volume shall not differ by more than 40 % of that specified for the type-approved engine in Annex VI; power absorbed by the auxiliaries needed for operating the engine shall not exceed that specified for the type-approved engine in Annex VI. 8. ENGINE FAMILY 8. 1. Parameters defining the engine family The engine family, as determined by the engine manufacturer, may be defined by basic characteristics which must be common to engines within the family. In some cases there may C 173/20 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 be interaction of parameters. These effects must also be taken into consideration to ensure that only engines with similar exhaust emission characteristics are included within an engine family. In order that engines may be considered to belong to the same engine family, the following list of basic parameters must be common: 8. 1. 1. 8. 1. 2. Combustion cycle: — 2 cycle — 4 cycle Cooling medium: — air — water — oil 8. 1. 3. Number of cylinders (for gas engines and engines with after-treatment device only) (engines with fewer cylinders than the parent engine may be considered to belong to the same engine family provided the fuelling system meters fuel for each individual cylinder). 8. 1. 4. 8. 1. 5. 8. 1. 6. 8. 1. 7. 8. 1. 8. Individual cylinder displacement: — engines to be within a total spread of 15 % Method of air aspiration: — naturally aspirated — pressure charged Combustion chamber type/design: — pre-chamber — swirl chamber — open chamber Valve and porting-configuration, size and number: — cylinder head — cylinder wall — crankcase Fuel injection system (diesel engines): — pump-line-injector — in-line pump — distributor pump — single element — unit injector 8. 1. 9. Fuelling system (gas engines): — mixing unit — vapour injection (single point, multi point) — liquid injection (single point, multi point). 8. 1. 10. Ignition system (gas engines) 8. 1. 11. Miscellaneous features: — exhaust gas recirculation — water injection/emulsion — air injection — charge cooling system 8. 1. 12. Exhaust after-treatment: — 3-way-catalyst — oxidation catalyst — reduction catalyst — thermal reactor — particulate trap 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/21 8. 2. Choice of the parent engine 8. 2. 1. Diesel engines The parent engine of the family shall be selected using the primary criteria of the highest fuel delivery per stroke at the declared maximum torque speed. In the event that two or more engines share this primary criteria the parent engine shall be selected using the secondary criteria of highest fuel delivery per stroke at rated speed. Under certain circumstances, the approval authority may conclude that the worst case emission rate of the family can best be characterised by testing a second engine. Thus, the approval authority may select an additional engine for test based upon features which indicate that it may have the highest emission level of the engines within that family. If engines within the family incorporate other variable features which could be considered to affect exhaust emissions, these features shall also be identified and taken into account in the selection of the parent engine. 8. 2. 2. Gas engines The parent engine of the family shall be selected using the primary criteria of the largest displacement. In the event that two or more engines share this primary criteria, the parent engine shall be selected using the secondary criteria in the following order: — the highest fuel delivery per stroke at the speed of declared rates power; — the most advanced spark timing; — the lowest EGR rate; — no air pump or lowest actual air flow pump. Under certain circumstances, the approval authority may conclude that the worst case emission rate of the family can best be characterised by testing a second engine. Thus, the approval authority may select an additional engine for test based upon features which indicate that it may have the highest emission level of the engines within that family. 9. 9. 1. PRODUCTION CONFORMITY Measures to ensure production conformity must be taken in accordance with the provisions of Article 10 of Directive 70/156/EEC. Production conformity is checked on the basis of the description in the type-approval certificates set out in Annex VI to this Directive. Sections 2. 4. 2 and 2. 4. 3 of Annex X to Directive 70/156/EEC are applicable where the competent authorities are not satisfied with the auditing procedure of the manufacturer. 9. 1. 1. If emissions of pollutants are to be measured and an engine type-approval has had one or several extensions, the tests will be carried out on the engine(s) described in the information package relating to the relevant extension. 9. 1. 1. 1. Conformity of the engine subjected to a pollutant test: After submission of the engine to the authorities, the manufacturer shall not carry out any adjustment to the engines selected. 9. 1. 1. 1. 1. Three engines are randomly taken in the series and are subjected to the test referred to in Section 6. 2. The limit values are given in Section 6. 2. 1 of this Annex. 9. 1. 1. 1. 2. The tests are carried out according to Appendix 1 to this Annex, where the competent authority is satisfied with the production standard deviation given by the manufacturer, in accordance with Annex X to Directive 70/156/EEC, which applies to motor vehicles and their trailers. The tests are carried out according to Appendix 2 to this Annex, where the competent authority is not satisfied with the production standard deviation given by the manufacturer, in accordance with Annex X to Directive 70/156/EEC, which applies to motor vehicles and their trailers. The tests are carried out according to Appendix 2 to this Annex, where the competent authority is not satisfied with the production standard deviation given by the manufacturer, in accordance with Annex X to Directive 70/156/EEC, which applies to motor vehicles and their trailers. At the manufacturer’s request, the tests may be carried out in accordance with Appendix 3 to this Annex. C 173/22 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 9. 1. 1. 1. 3. On the basis of a test of the engine by sampling, the production of a series is regarded as conforming where a pass decision is reached for all the pollutants and non conforming where a fail decision is reached for one pollutant, in accordance with the test criteria applied in the appropriate Appendix. When a pass decision has been reached for one pollutant, this decision may not be changed by any additional tests made in order to reach a decision for the other pollutants. If no pass decision is reached for all the pollutants and if no fail decision is reached for one pollutant, a test is carried out on another engine (see Figure 2). If no decision is reached, the manufacturer may at any time decide to stop testing. In that case a fail decision is recorded. 9. 1. 1. 2. The tests will be carried out on newly-manufactured engines. Gas-fuelled engines shall be run-in using the procedure defined in paragraph 3 of Appendix 2 to Annex III. 9. 1. 1. 2. 1. However, at the request of the manufacturer, the tests may be carried out on diesel or gas engines which have been run-in more than the period referred to in Section 9. 1. 1. 2. up to a maximum of 100 hours. In this case, the running-in procedure will be conducted by the manufacturer who shall undertake not to make any adjustments to those engines. 9. 1. 1. 2. 2. When the manufacturer asks to conduct a running-in procedure in accordance with section 9. 1. 1. 2. 1. it may be carried out on: — all the engines that are tested, or, — the first engine tested, with the determination of an evolution coefficient as follows: — the pollutant emissions will be measures at zero and at ‘x’ hours on the first engine tested, — the evolution coefficient of the emissions between zero and ‘x’ hours will be calculated for each pollutant: Emissions ‘x’ hours Emissions zero hours It may be less than one. The subsequent test engines will not be subjected to the running-in procedure, but their zero hour emissions will be modified by the evolution coefficient. In this case, the values to be taken will be: — the values at ‘x’ hours for the first engine, — the values at zero hour multiplied by the evolution coefficient for the other engines. 9. 1. 1. 2. 3. For diesel and LPG fuelled gas engines all these tests may be conducted with commercial fuel. However, at the manufacturer’s request, the reference fuels described in Annex IV may be used. This implies tests, as described in Section 4 of this Annex, with at least two of the reference fuels for each gas engine. 9. 1. 1. 2. 4. For NG fuelled gas engines, all these tests may be conducted with commercial fuel in the following way: — for H marked engines with a commercial fuel within the H range; — For L marked engines with a commercial fuel within the L range; — for HL marked engines with a commercial fuel within the H or the L range. However, at the manufacturer’s request, the reference fuels described in Annex IV may be used. This implies tests, as described in Section 4 of this Annex, with at least two of the reference fuels for each gas engine. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/23 9. 1. 1. 2. 5. In the case of dispute caused by the non-compliance of gas-fuelled engines when using a commercial fuel, the tests shall be performed with a reference fuel on which the parent engine has been tested, or with the possible additional fuel 3 as referred to in paragraphs 4. 1. 3. 1 and 4. 2. 1. 1 on which the parent engine may have been tested. Then, the result has to be converted by a calculation applying the relevant factor(s) ‘r’, ‘ra’ or ‘rb’ as described in paragraphs 4. 1. 3. 2, 4. 1. 4. 1 and 4. 2. 1. 2. If r, ra or rb are less than one no correction shall take place. The measured results and the calculated results must demonstrate that the engine meets the limit values with all relevant fuels (fuels 1, 2 and, if applicable, fuel 3). 9. 1. 1. 2. 6. Tests for conformity of production of a gas-fuelled engine laid out for operation on one specific fuel composition shall be performed on the fuel for which the engine has been calibrated. Figure 2 Schematic of production conformity testing Test of three engines Computation of the test statistic result According to the appropriate appendix does the test statistic result agree with the criteria for failing the series for at least one pollutant? YES Series rejected NO NO According to the appropriate appendix does the test statistic result agree with the criteria for passing the series for at least one pollutant? YES A pass decision is reached for one or more pollutants Is a pass decision reached for all pollutants? YES Series accepted NO Test of an additional engine C 173/24 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Appendix 1 PROCEDURE FOR PRODUCTION CONFORMITY TESTING WHEN STANDARD DEVIATION IS SATISFACTORY 1. This appendix describes the procedure to be used to verify production conformity for the emissions of pollutants when the manufacturer’s production standard deviation is satisfactory. 2. With a minimum sample size of three engines the sampling procedure is set so that the probability of a lot passing a test with 40 % of the engines defective is 0,95 (producer’s risk = 5 %) while the probability of a lot being accepted with 65 % of the engines defective is 0,10 (consumer’s risk = 10 %). 3. The following procedure is used for each of the pollutants given in Section 6. 2. 1. of Annex I (see Figure 2): Let: L = xi = s = n = the natural logarithm of the limit value for the pollutant; the natural logarithm of the measurement for the i-th engine of the sample; an estimate of the production standard deviation (after taking the natural logarithm of the measurements); the current sample number. 4. For each sample the sum of the standardised deviations to the limit is calculated using the following formula: 5. Then: 1 nΣ S i = 1 (L–xi) — if the test statistic result is greater than the pass decision number for the sample size given in Table 3, a pass decision is reached for the pollutant; — if the test statistic result is less than the fail decision number for the sample size given in Table 3, a fail decision is reached for the pollutant; — otherwise, an additional engine is tested according to Section 9. 1. 1. 1. of Annex I and the calculation procedure is applied to the sample increased by one more unit. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/25 Table 3 Pass and fail decision numbers of Appendix 1 sampling plan Minimum sample size: 3 Cumulative number of engines tested (sample size) Pass decision number An Fail decision number Bn 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 3,327 3,261 3,195 3,129 3,063 2,997 2,931 2,865 2,799 2,733 2,667 2,601 2,535 2,469 2,403 2,337 2,271 2,205 2,139 2,073 2,007 1,941 1,875 1,809 1,743 1,677 1,611 1,545 1,479 − 2,112 − 4,724 − 4,790 − 4,856 − 4,922 − 4,988 − 5,054 − 5,120 − 5,185 − 5,251 − 5,317 − 5,383 − 5,449 − 5,515 − 5,581 − 5,647 − 5,713 − 5,779 − 5,845 − 5,911 − 5,977 − 6,043 − 6,109 − 6,175 − 6,241 − 6,307 − 6,373 − 6,439 − 6,505 − 6,571 − 2,112 C 173/26 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Appendix 2 PROCEDURE FOR PRODUCTION CONFORMITY TESTING WHEN STANDARD DEVIATION IS UNSATISFACTORY OR UNAVAILABLE 1. This appendix describes the procedure to be used to verify production conformity for the emissions of is either unsatisfactory or pollutants when the manufacturer’s production standard deviation unavailable. 2. With a minimum sample size of three engines the sampling procedure is set so that the probality of a lot passing a test with 40 % of the engines defective is 0,95 (producer’s risk = 5 %) while the probability of a lot being accepted with 65 % of the engines defective is 0,10 (consumer’s risk = 10 %). 3. The values of the pollutants given in Section 6. 2. 1 of Annex I are considered to be log normally distributed and should be transformed by taking their natural logarithms. Let m0 and m denote the minimum and maximum sample size repectively (m0 = 3 and m = 32) and let n denote the current sample number. 4. If the natural logarithms of the values measured in the series are x1, x2,. , xi and L is the natural logarithm of the limit value for the pollutant, then, define and, di = xi − L dn = Σn i = 1 1 n di Vn 2 = Σn i = 1 1 n — n )2 (di – d 5. Table 4 shows values of the pass (An) and fail (Bn) decision numbers against current sample number. The test statistic result is the ratio dn / Vn and shall be used to determine whether the series has passed or failed as follows: For m0 < n , m: — pass the series if dn / Vn < An — fail the series if dn / Vn > Bn — take another measurement if An , dn / Vn , Bn 6. Remarks The following recursive formulae are useful for calculating successive values of the test statistic: 1 dn = (1 − 2 = (1 − n) dn − 1 + n) Vn − 1 + 1 2 Vn 1 n dn (dn − dn)2 n − 1 (n = 2, 3,. ; d1 = d1; V1 = 0) 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/27 Table 4 Pass and fail decision numbers of Appendix 2 sampling plan Minimum sample size: 3 Cumulative number of engines tested (sample size) Pass decision number An Fail decision number Bn 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 − 0,80381 − 0,76339 − 0,72982 − 0,69962 − 0,67129 − 0,64406 0,61750 − 0,59135 − 0,56542 − 0,53960 − 0,51379 − 0,48791 − 0,46191 − 0,43573 − 0,40933 − 0,38266 − 0,35570 − 0,32840 − 0,30072 − 0,27263 − 0,24410 − 0,21509 − 0,18557 − 0,15550 − 0,12483 − 0,09354 − 0,06159 − 0,02892 − 0,00449 0,03876 16,64743 7,68627 4,67136 3,25573 2,45431 1,94369 1,59105 1,33295 1,13566 0,97970 0,85307 0,74801 0,65928 0,58321 0,51718 0,45922 0,40788 0,36203 0,32078 0,28343 0,24943 0,21831 0,18970 0,16328 0,13880 0,11603 0,09480 0,07493 0,05629 0,03876 C 173/28 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 PROCEDURE FOR PRODUCTION CONFORMITY TESTING AT MANUFACTURER’S REQUEST Appendix 3 1. This appendix describes the procedure to be used to verify, at the manufacturer’s request, production conformity for the emissions of pollutants. 2. With a minimum sample size of three engines the sampling procedure is set so that the probability of a lot passing a test with 30 % of the engines defective is 0,90 (producer’s risk = 10 %) while the probability of a lot being accepted with 65 % of the engines defective is 0,10 (consumer’s risk = 10 %). 3. The following procedure is used for each of the pollutants given in Section 6. 2. 1 of Annex I (see Figure 2): Let: L = be the limit value for the pollutant, xi = the value of the measurement for the i-th engine of the sample, n = is the current sample number. 4. Calculate for the sample the test statistic quantifying the number of non-conforming engines, i. e. xi. L: 5. Then: — if the test statistic is less than or equal to the pass decision number for the sample size given in Table 5. a pass decision is reached for the pollutant; — if the test statistic is greater than or equal to the fail decision number for the sample size given in Table 5. a fail decision is reached for the pollutant; — otherwise, an additional engine is tested according to Section 9. 1. 1. 1 of Annex I and the calculation procedure is applied to the sample increased by one more unit. In Table 5 the pass and fail decision numbers are calculated by means of the International Standard ISO 8422/1991. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/29 Table 5 Pass and fail decision numbers of Appendix 3 sampling plan Minimum sample size: 3 Cumulative number of engines tested (sample size) Pass decision number Fail decision number 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 — 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 8 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 9 C 173/30 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 ANNEX II INFORMATION DOCUMENT No. IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANNEX I OF COUNCIL DIRECTIVE 70/156/EEC RELATING TO EC TYPE-APPROVAL and referring to measures to be taken against the emission of gaseous and particulate pollutants from diesel engines for use in vehicles, and the emission of gaseous pollutants from positive ignition engines fuelled with natural gas or LPG for use in vehicles (Directive 88/77/EEC as last amended by Directive. /. /EEC) Vehicle type/parent engine/engine type (1):. GENERAL Make (name of undertaking):. Type and commercial description (mention any variants):. Means and location of identification of type, if marked on the vehicle:. Category of vehicle (if applicable):. Category of engine: diesel/NG fuelled/LPG fuelled (1):. Name and address of manufacturer:. Location of statutory plates and inscriptions and method of affixing:. In the case of components and separate technical units, location and method of affixing of the EC approval mark:. Address(es) of assembly plant(s):. ATTACHMENTS Essential characteristics of the (parent) engine and information concerning the conduct of test. Essential characteristics of the engine family Essential characteristics of the engine types within the family Characteristics of the engine-related vehicle parts (if applicable). Photographs and/or drawings of the parent engine/engine type and, if applicable, of the engine compartment. List further attachments if any. 0. 0. 1. 0. 2. 0. 3. 0. 4. 0. 5. 0. 6. 0. 7. 0. 8. 0. 9. 1. 1. 1. 1. 2. 1. 3. 2. 3. 4. Date, file (1) Delete as appropriate. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/31 ESSENTIAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE (PARENT) ENGINE AND INFORMATION CONCERNING THE CONDUCT OF TEST (1) Appendix 1 1. 1. 1. 1. 2. 1. 3. 1. 4. 1. 4. 1. 1. 4. 2. 1. 4. 3. 1. 5. 1. 6. 1. 7. 1. 8. 1. 9. 1. 10. 1. 11. 1. 12. 1. 13. 1. 14. 1. 15. Description of engine Manufacturer:. Manufacturer’s engine code:. Cycle: four stroke / two stroke (2) Number and arrangement of cylinders:. Bore:. mm Stroke:. mm Firing order:. Engine capacity:. cm³ Volumetric compression ratio (3):. Drawing(s) of combustion chamber and piston crown:. Minimum cross-sectional area of inlet and outlet ports:. cm² Idling speed:. min−1 Maximum net power:. kW at. min −1 Maximum permitted engine speed:. min−1 Maximum net torque:. Nm at. min −1 Combustion system: compression ignition/positive ignition (2). Fuel: Diesel//LPG/NG-H/NG-L/NG-HL (2) Cooling system 1. 15. 1. L i q u i d 1. 15. 1. 1. Nature of liquid:. 1. 15. 1. 2. Circulating pump(s): yes/no (2) 1. 15. 1. 3. Characteristics or make(s) and type(s) (if applicable):. 1. 15. 1. 4. Drive ratio(s) (if applicable):. 1. 15. 2. A i r 1. 15. 2. 1. Blower: yes/no (2) 1. 15. 2. 2. Characteristics or make(s) and type(s) (if applicable):. 1. 15. 2. 3. Drive ratio(s) (if applicable):. 1. 16. Temperature permitted by the manufacturer 1. 16. 1. Liquid cooling: maximum temperature at outlet:. K 1. 16. 2. Air cooling: reference point:. Maximum temperature at reference point:. K (1) In the case of non-conventional engines and systems, particulars equivalent to those referred to here shall be supplied by the manufacturer. (2) Strike out what does not apply. (3) Specify the tolerance. C 173/32 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 1. 16. 3. 1. 16. 4. Maximum temperature of the air the outlet of the intake intercooler (if applicable):. K Maximum exhaust temperature at the point in the exhaust pipe(s) adjacent to the outer flange(s) of the exhaust manifold(s) or turbocharger(s):. K 1. 16. 5. Fuel temperature: min. K, max. K for diesel engines at injection pump inlet, for gas fuelled engines at pressure regulator final stage 1. 16. 6. Fuel pressure: min. kPa, max. kPa at pressure regulator final stage, NG fuelled gas engines only 1. 16. 7. Lubricant temperature: min. K, max. K 1. 17. Pressure charger: yes/no (1) 1. 17. 1. Make:. 1. 17. 2. Type:. 1. 17. 3. Description of the system (e. g. max. charge pressure, wastegate, if applicable):. 1. 17. 4. Intercooler: yes/no (1) 1. 18. Intake system Maximum allowable intake depression at rated engine speed and at 100 % load as specified in and under the operating conditions of Directive 80/1269/EEC (2), as last amended by Directive 89/491/EEC(3):. kPa 1. 19. Exhaust system Maximum allowable exhaust back pressure at rated engine speed at 100 % load as specified in and under the operating conditions of Directive 80/1269/EEC (2), as last amended by Directive 89/491/EEC (3):. kPa Exhaust system volume:. cm³ 2. 2. 1. 2. 2. Measures taken against air pollution Device for recycling crankcase gases (description and drawings):. Additional anti-pollution devices (if any, and if not covered by another heading). 2. 2. 1. Catalytic converter: yes/no (1) 2. 2. 1. 1. Make(s):. 2. 2. 1. 2. Type(s):. 2. 2. 1. 3. Number of catalytic converters and elements:. 2. 2. 1. 4. Dimensions, shape and volume of the catalytic converter(s):. 2. 2. 1. 5. Type of catalytic action:. 2. 2. 1. 6. Total charge of precious metals:. (1) Strike out what does not apply. (2) OJ L 375, 31. 12. 1980, p. 46. (3) OJ L 238, 15. 8. 1989, p. 43. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/33 2. 2. 1. 7. Relative concentration:. 2. 2. 1. 8. Substrate (structure and material):. 2. 2. 1. 9. Cell density:. 2. 2. 1. 10. Type of casing for the catalytic converter(s):. 2. 2. 1. 11. Location of the catalytic converter(s) (place and reference distance in the exhaust line):. 2. 2. 2. Oxygen sensor: yes/no (1) 2. 2. 2. 1. Make(s):. 2. 2. 2. 2. Type:. 2. 2. 2. 3. Location:. 2. 2. 3. Air injection: yes/no (1) 2. 2. 3. 1. Type (pulse air, air pump, etc. ):. 2. 2. 4. EGR: yes/no (1) 2. 2. 4. 1. Characteristics (flow rate etc. ):. 2. 2. 5. Particulate trap: yes/no (1) 2. 2. 5. 1. Dimensions, shape and capacity of the particulate trap:. 2. 2. 5. 2. Type and design of the particulate trap:. 2. 2. 5. 3. Location (reference distance in the exhaust line):. 2. 2. 5. 4. Method or system of regeneration, description and/or drawing:. 2. 2. 6. Other systems: yes/no (1) 2. 2. 6. 1. Description and operation:. 3. 3. 1. Fuel feed Diesel engines 3. 1. 1. F e e d p u m p Pressure (2):. kPa or characteristic diagram (2):. 3. 1. 2. I n j e c t i o n s y s t e m 3. 1. 2. 1. Pump 3. 1. 2. 1. 1. Make(s):. 3. 1. 2. 1. 2. Type(s):. 3. 1. 2. 1. 3. Delivery:. mm³ (2) per stroke at engine speed of. rpm at full injection, or characteristic diagram (1) (2):. Mention the method used: On engine/on pump bench (1) If boost control is supplied, state the characteristic fuel delivery and boost pressure versus engine speed. 3. 1. 2. 1. 4. Injection advance 3. 1. 2. 1. 4. 1. Injection advance curve (2):. 3. 1. 2. 1. 4. 2. Static injection timing (2):. 3. 1. 2. 2. Injection piping 3. 1. 2. 2. 1. Length:. mm 3. 1. 2. 2. 2. Internal diameter:. mm 3. 1. 2. 3. Injector(s) (1) Strike out what does not apply. (2) Specify the tolerance. C 173/34 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. Make(s):. 3. 1. 2. 3. 2. Type(s):. 3. 1. 2. 3. 3. ‘Opening pressure’:. kPa (2) or characteristic diagram (1) (2):. 3. 1. 2. 4. Governor 3. 1. 2. 4. 1. Make(s):. 3. 1. 2. 4. 2. Type(s):. 3. 1. 2. 4. 3. Speed at which cut-off starts under full load:. rpm 3. 1. 2. 4. 4. Maximum no-load speed:. rpm 3. 1. 2. 4. 5. Idling speed:. rpm 3. 1. 3. C o l d s t a r t s y s t e m 3. 1. 3. 1. Make(s):. 3. 1. 3. 2. Type(s):. 3. 1. 3. 3. Description:. 3. 1. 3. 4. Auxiliary starting aid:. 3. 1. 3. 4. 1. Make:. 3. 1. 3. 4. 2. Type:. 3. 2. 3. 2. 1. 3. 2. 2. Gas-fuelled engines (3) Fuel: Natural gas/LPG (1) Pressure regulator(s) or vaporiser/pressure regulator(s) (1) 3. 2. 2. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 2. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 2. 3. Number of pressure reduction stages:. 3. 2. 2. 4. Pressure in final stage: min. kPa, max. kPa 3. 2. 2. 5. Number of main adjustment points:. 3. 2. 2. 6. Number of idle adjustment points:. 3. 2. 2. 7. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC:. 3. 2. 3. Fuelling system: mixing unit / gas injection / liquid injection / direct injection (1) 3. 2. 3. 1. Mixture strenght regulation:. 3. 2. 3. 2. System description and/or diagram and drawings:. 3. 2. 3. 3. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC:. 3. 2. 4. Mixing unit 3. 2. 4. 1. Number:. 3. 2. 4. 2. Make(s):. 3. 2. 4. 3. Type(s):. 3. 2. 4. 4. Location:. 3. 2. 4. 5. Adjustment possibilities:. (1) Strike out what does not apply. (2) Specify the tolerance. (3) In the case of systems laid-out in a different manner, supply equivalent information (for paragraph 3. 2). 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/35 3. 2. 4. 6. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC:. 3. 2. 5. Inlet manifold injection 3. 2. 5. 1. Injection: single point / multipoint (1) 3. 2. 5. 2. Injection: continous / simultaneously timed / sequentially timed (1) 3. 2. 5. 3. Injection equipment 3. 2. 5. 3. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 5. 3. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 5. 3. 3. Adjustment possibilities:. 3. 2. 5. 3. 4. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC:. 3. 2. 5. 4. Supply pump (if applicable): 3. 2. 5. 4. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 5. 4. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 5. 4. 3. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC:. 3. 2. 5. 5. Injector(s) 3. 2. 5. 5. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 5. 5. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 5. 5. 3. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC:. 3. 2. 6. Direct injection 3. 2. 6. 1. Injection pump / pressure regulator (1) 3. 2. 6. 1. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 6. 1. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 6. 1. 3. Injection timing:. 3. 2. 6. 1. 4. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC:. 3. 2. 6. 2. Injector(s) 3. 2. 6. 2. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 6. 2. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 6. 2. 3. Opening pressure or characteristic diagram (2):. 3. 2. 6. 2. 4. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC:. 3. 2. 7. Electronic control unit (ECU) 3. 2. 7. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 7. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 7. 3. Adjustment possibilities:. 3. 2. 8. N G f u e l - s p e c i f i c e q u i p m e n t 3. 2. 8. 1. Variant 1 (only in the case of approvals of engines for several specific fuel compositions) 3. 2. 8. 1. 1. Fuel composition: methane (CH4): basis:. % mole min. % mole max. % mole ethane (C2H6): basis:. % mole min. % mole max. % mole propane (C3H8): basis:. % mole min. % mole max. % mole (1) Strike out what does not apply. (2) Specify the tolerance. C 173/36 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 butane (C4H10): basis:. % mole min. % mole max. % mole C5/C5+: basis:. % mole min. % mole max. % mole oxygen (O2): basis:. % mole min. % mole max. % mole inert (N2, He, etc. ): basis:. % mole min. % mole max. % mole 3. 2. 8. 1. 2. Injector(s) 3. 2. 8. 1. 2. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 8. 1. 2. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 8. 1. 3. Others (if applicable) 3. 2. 8. 2. Variant 2 (only in the case of approvals for several specific fuel compositions) 4. 4. 1. 4. 2. 5. 5. 1. 5. 2. Valve timing Maximum lift of valves and angles of opening and closing in relation to dead centres of equivalent data:. Reference and/or setting ranges (1):. Ignition system (spark ignition engines only) Ignition system type: common coil and plugs / individual coil and plugs / other (specify) (1) Ignition control unit 5. 2. 1. Make(s):. 5. 2. 2. Type(s):. 5. 3. 5. 4. Ignition advance curve / advance map (1) (2):. Ignition timing (2):. degrees before TDC at a speed of. rpm and a MAP of. kPa 5. 5. Spark plugs 5. 5. 1. Make(s):. 5. 5. 2. Type(s):. 5. 5. 3. Gap setting:. mm 5. 6. Ignition coil(s) 5. 6. 1. Make(s):. 5. 6. 2. Type(s):. 6. Engine-driven equipment The engine shall be submitted for testing with the auxiliaries needed for operating the engine (e. g. fan. water pump etc. ), as specified in and under the operating conditions of Directive 80/1269/EEC (3), as last amended by Directive 89/491/EEC (4), Annex I, Section 5. 1. 1. (1) Strike out what does not apply. (2) Specify the tolerance. (3) OJ L 375, 31. 12. 1980, p. 46. (4) OJ L 238, 15. 8. 1989, p. 43. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/37 6. 1. Auxiliaries to be fitted for the test If it is impossible or inappropriate to install the auxiliaries on the test bench, the power absorbed by them shall be determined and subtracted from the measured engine power over the whole operating area of the test cycle(s). 6. 2. Auxiliaries to be removed for the test Auxiliaries needed only for the operation of the vehicle (e. g. air compressor, air-conditioning system etc. ) shall be removed for the test. Where the auxiliaries cannot be removed, the power absorbed by them may be determined and added to the measured engine power over the whole operating area of the test cycle(s). 7. Additional information on test conditions 7. 1. Lubricant used 7. 1. 1. Make:. 7. 1. 2. Type:. (State percentage of oil in mixture if lubricant and fuel are mixed):. 7. 2. Engine-driven equipment (if applicable) The power absorbed by the auxiliaries needs only be determined, — if auxiliaries needed for operating the engine, are not fitted to the engine and/or — if auxiliaries not needed for operating the engine, are fitted to the engine. 7. 2. 1. Enumeration and identifying details:. 7. 2. 2. Power absorbed at various indicated engine speeds: Power absorbed (kW) at various engine speeds Idle Low speed High speed Speed A (1) Speed B (1) Speed C (1) Ref. speed (2) Equipment P(a) Auxiliaries needed for operating the engine (to be subtracted from measured engine power) see Section 6. 1 P(b) Auxiliaries not needed for operating the engine (to be added to measured engine power) see Section 6. 2 (1) ESC test. (2) ETC test only. C 173/38 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 8. 8. 1. Engine performance Engine speeds (1) Low speed (nlo):. rpm High speed (nhi):. rpm for ESC and ELR cycles Idle:. rpm Speed A:. rpm Speed B:. rpm Speed C:. rpm for ETC cycle Reference speed:. rpm 8. 2. Engine power (measured in accordance with the provisions of Directive 80/1269/EEC (2), as last amended by Directive 89/491/EEC (3)] in kW Engine speed Idle Speed A (1) Speed B (1) Speed C (1) Ref. speed (2) P(m) Power measured on test bed P(a) Power absorbed by auxiliaries to be fitted for test (Section 6. 1) — if fitted — if not fitted P(b) Power absorbed by auxiliaries to be removed for test (Section 6. 2) — if fitted — if not fitted P(n) Net engine power = P(m) − P(a) + P(b) (1) ESC test. (2) ETC test only. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8. 3. Dynamometer settings (kW) The dynamometer settings for the ESC and ELR tests and for the reference cycle of the ETC test shall be based upon the net engine power P(n) of Section 8. 2. It is recommended to install the engine on the test bed in the net condition. In this case, P(m) and P(n) are identical. If it is impossible or inappropriate to operate the engine under net conditions, the dynamometer settings shall be corrected to net conditions using above formula. (1) Specify the tolerance; to be within 6 3 % of the values declared by the manufacturer. (2) OJ L 375, 31. 12. 1980, p. 46. (3) OJ L 238, 15. 8. 1989, p. 43. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/39 8. 3. 1. E S C a n d E L R t e s t s The dynamometer settings shall be calculated according to the formula in Annex III. Appendix 1. Section 1. 2. Per cent load Engine speed Idle Speed A Speed B Speed C 10 25 50 75 100 — — — — 8. 3. 2. E T C t e s t If the engine is not tested under net conditions, the correction formula for converting the measured power or measured cycle work, as determined according to Annex III. Appendix 2, Section 2, to net power or net cycle work shall be submitted by the engine manufacturer for the whole operating area of the cycle, and approved by the Technical Service. C 173/40 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Appendix 2 ESSENTIAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE ENGINE FAMILY 1. 1. 1. 1. 2. 1. 3. 1. 4. 1. 5. 1. 6. 1. 7. 1. 8. 1. 9. COMMON PARAMETERS Combustion cycle:. Cooling medium:. Number of cylinders (1):. Individual cylinder displacement:. Method of air aspiration:. Combustion chamber type/design:. Valve and porting — configuration, size and number:. Fuel system:. Ignition system (gas engines):. 1. 10. Miscellaneous features: — charge cooling system (1):. — exhaust gas recirculation (1):. — water injection/emulsion (1):. — air injection (1):. 1. 11. Exhaust after-treatment (1):. Proof of identical (or lowest for the parent engine) ratio: system capacity / fuel delivery per stroke, pursuant to diagram number(s):. 2. 2. 1. Engine family listing Name of diesel engine family:. 2. 1. 1. Specification of engines within this family: Parent engine Engine type No. of cylinders Rated speed (rpm) Fuel delivery per stroke (mm³) Rated net power (kW) Maximum torque speed (rpm) Fuel delivery per stroke (mm³) Maximum torque (Nm) Low idle speed (rpm) Cylinder displacement (in % of parent engine) (1) If not applicable, mark n. a. 100 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/41 2. 2. Name of gas engine family:. 2. 2. 1. Specification of engines within this family: Parent engine Engine type No. of cylinders Rated speed (rpm) Fuel delivery per stroke (mg) Rated net power (kW) Maximum torque speed (rpm) Fuel delivery per stroke (mm³) Maximal torque (Nm) Low idle speed (rpm) Cylinder displacement (in % of parent engine) Spark timing EGR flow Air pump yes / no Air pump actual flow 100 C 173/42 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 ESSENTIAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE ENGINE TYPE WITHIN THE FAMILY (1) Appendix 3 1. 1. 1. 1. 2. 1. 3. 1. 4. Description of engine Manufacturer:. Manufacturer’s engine code:. Cycle: four stroke/two stroke (2) Number and arrangement of cylinders:. 1. 4. 1. Bore:. mm 1. 4. 2. Stroke:. mm 1. 4. 3. Firing order:. 1. 5. 1. 6. 1. 7. 1. 8. 1. 9. 1. 10. 1. 11. 1. 12. 1. 13. 1. 14. 1. 15. Engine capacity:. cm³ Volumetric compression ratio (3). Drawings(s) of combustion chamber and piston crown:. Minimum cross-sectional area of inlet and outlet ports:. cm² Idling speed:. min−1 Maximum net power:. kW at. min −1 Maximum permitted engine speed:. min−1 Maximum net torque:. Nm at. min −1 Combustion system: compression ignition/positive ignition (2). Fuel: Diesel/LPG/NG-H/NG-L/NG-HL (2). Cooling system 1. 15. 1. L i q u i d 1. 15. 1. 1. Nature of liquid:. 1. 15. 1. 2. Circulating pump(s): yes/no (2) 1. 15. 1. 3. Characteristics or make(s) and type(s) (if applicable):. 1. 15. 1. 4. Drive ratio(s) (if applicable):. 1. 15. 2. A i r 1. 15. 2. 1. Blower: yes/no (2) 1. 15. 2. 2. Characteristics or make(s) and type(s) (if applicable):. 1. 15. 2. 3. Drive ratio(s) (if applicable):. 1. 16. Temperature permitted by the manufacturer 1. 16. 1. Liquid cooling: Maximum temperature at outlet:. K 1. 16. 2. Air cooling: Reference point:. (1) To be submitted for each engine of the family. (2) Strike out what does not apply. (3) Specify the tolerance. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/43 Maximum temperature at reference point:. K 1. 16. 3. Maximum temperature of the air the outlet of the intake intercooler (if applicable):. K 1. 16. 4. Maximum exhaust temperature at the point in the exhaust pipe(s) adjacent to the outer flange(s) of the exhaust manifold(s) or turbocharger(s):. K 1. 16. 5. Fuel temperature: min. K, max. K for diesel engines at injection pump inlet, for NG fuelled gas engines at pressure regulator final stage 1. 16. 6. Fuel pressure: min. KPa, max. kPa at pressure regulator final stage, NG fuelled gas engines only 1. 16. 7. Lubrificant temperature: min. K, max. K 1. 17. Pressure charger: yes/no (1) 1. 17. 1. Make:. 1. 17. 2. Type:. 1. 17. 3. Description of the system (e. g. max. charge pressure, wastegate, if applicable):. 1. 17. 4. Intercooler: yes/no (1) 1. 18. Intake system Maximum allowable intake depression at rated engine speed and at 100 % load as specified in and under the operating conditions of Dirtective 80/1269/EEC (2), as last amended by Directive 89/491/EEC (3):. kPa 1. 19. Exhaust system Maximum allowable exhaust back pressure at rated engine speed and at 100 % load as specified in and under the operating conditions of Directive 80/1269/EEC (2), as last amended by Directive 89/491/EEC (3):. kPa Exhaust system volume:. cm³ 2. 2. 1. 2. 2. Measures taken against air pollution Device for recycling crankcase gases (description and drawings):. Additional anti-pollution devices (if any, and if not covered by another heading). 2. 2. 1. Catalytic converter yes/no (1) 2. 2. 1. 1. Number of catalytic converters and elements:. 2. 2. 1. 2. Dimensions, shape and volume of the catalytic converter(s):. 2. 2. 1. 3. Type of catalytic action:. 2. 2. 1. 4. Total charge of precious metals:. 2. 2. 1. 5. Relative concentration:. 2. 2. 1. 6. Substrate (structure and material):. 2. 2. 1. 7. Cell density:. (1) Strike out what does not apply. (2) OJ L 375, 31. 12. 1980, p. 46. (3) OJ L 238, 15. 8. 1989, p. 43. C 173/44 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 2. 2. 1. 8. Type of casing for the catalytic converter(s):. 2. 2. 1. 9. Location of the catalytic converter(s) (place and reference distance in the exhaust line):. 2. 2. 2. Oxygen sensor: yes/no (1) 2. 2. 2. 1. Type:. 2. 2. 3. Air injection: yes/no (1) 2. 2. 3. 1. Type (pulse air, air pump, etc. ):. 2. 2. 4. EGR: yes/no (1) 2. 2. 4. 1. Characteristics (flow rate etc. ):. 2. 2. 5. Particulate trap: yes/no (1) 2. 2. 5. 1. Dimensions, shape and capacity of the particulate trap:. 2. 2. 5. 2. Type and design of the particulate trap:. 2. 2. 5. 3. Location (reference distance in the exhaust line):. 2. 2. 5. 4. Method or system of regeneration, description and/or drawing:. 2. 2. 6. Other systems: yes/no (1) 2. 2. 6. 1. Description and operation:. 3. 3. 1. Fuel feed Diesel engines 3. 1. 1. Feed pump Pressure (2):. kPa or characteristic diagram (2):. 3. 1. 2. I n j e c t i o n s y s t e m 3. 1. 2. 1. Pump 3. 1. 2. 1. 1. Make(s):. 3. 1. 2. 1. 2. Type(s):. 3. 1. 2. 1. 3. Delivery:. mm³ (2) per stroke at engine speed of. rpm at full injection, or characteristic diagram (1) (2):. Mention the method used: On engine/on pump bench (1) If boost control is supplied, state the charcteristic fuel delivery and boost pressure versus engine speed. 3. 1. 2. 1. 4. Injection advance. 3. 1. 2. 1. 4. 1. Injection advance curve (2):. 3. 1. 2. 1. 4. 2. Static injection timing (2):. 3. 1. 2. 2. Injection piping 3. 1. 2. 2. 1. Length:. mm 3. 1. 2. 2. 2. Internal diameter:. mm 3. 1. 2. 3. Injector(s) 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. Make(s):. 3. 1. 2. 3. 2. Type(s):. 3. 1. 2. 3. 3. ‘Opening pressure’. kPa (2) or characteristic diagram (1) (2). (1) Strike out what does not apply. (2) Specify the tolerance. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/45 3. 1. 2. 4. Governor 3. 1. 2. 4. 1. Make(s):. 3. 1. 2. 4. 2. Type(s):. 3. 1. 2. 4. 3. Speed at which cut-off starts under full load:. rpm 3. 1. 2. 4. 4. Maximum no-load speed:. rpm 3. 1. 2. 4. 5. Idling speed:. rpm 3. 1. 3. C o l d s t a r t s y s t e m 3. 1. 3. 1. Make(s):. 3. 1. 3. 2. Type(s):. 3. 1. 3. 3. Description:. 3. 1. 3. 4. Auxiliary starting aid:. 3. 1. 3. 4. 1. Make:. 3. 1. 3. 4. 2. Type:. 3. 2. 3. 2. 1. 3. 2. 2. Gas-fuelled engines (1):. Fuel: Natural gas/LPG (2) Pressure regulator(s) or vaporiser/pressure regulator(s) (2) 3. 2. 2. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 2. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 2. 3. Number of pressure reduction stages:. 3. 2. 2. 4. Pressure in final stage: min. kPa, max. kPa 3. 2. 2. 5. Number of main adjustment points:. 3. 2. 2. 6. Number of idle adjustment points:. 3. 2. 2. 7. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC:. 3. 2. 3. Fuelling system: mixing unit / gas injection / liquid injection / direct injection (2) 3. 2. 3. 1. Mixture strength regulation:. 3. 2. 3. 2. System description and/or diagram and drawings:. 3. 2. 3. 3. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC:. 3. 2. 4. Mixing unit 3. 2. 4. 1. Number:. 3. 2. 4. 2. Make(s):. 3. 2. 4. 3. Type(s):. 3. 2. 4. 4. Location:. 3. 2. 4. 5. Adjustment possibilities:. 3. 2. 4. 6. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC:. 3. 2. 5. Inlet manifold injection 3. 2. 5. 1. Injection: single point / multipoint (2): 3. 2. 5. 2. Injection: continuous / simultaneously timed / sequentially timed (2) 3. 2. 5. 3. Injection equipment (1) In the case of systems laid-out in a different manner, supply equivalent information (for paragraph 3. 2). (2) Strike out what does not apply. C 173/46 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 3. 2. 5. 3. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 5. 3. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 5. 3. 3. Adjustment possibilities:. 3. 2. 5. 3. 4. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC:. 3. 2. 5. 4. Supply pump (if applicable) 3. 2. 5. 4. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 5. 4. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 5. 4. 3. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC: 3. 2. 5. 5. Injector(s) 3. 2. 5. 5. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 5. 5. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 5. 5. 3. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC:. 3. 2. 6. Direct injection 3. 2. 6. 1. Injection pump / pressure regulator (1) 3. 2. 6. 1. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 6. 1. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 6. 1. 3. Injection timing:. 3. 2. 6. 1. 4. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC:. 3. 2. 6. 2. Injector(s) 3. 2. 6. 2. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 6. 2. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 6. 2. 3. Opening pressure or characteristic diagram (2):. 3. 2. 6. 2. 4. Certification number according to Directive. /. /EC:. 3. 2. 7. Electronic control unit (ECU) 3. 2. 7. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 7. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 7. 3. Adjustment possibilities:. 3. 2. 8. NG fuel-specific equipment 3. 2. 8. 1. Variant 1 (only in the case of approvals of engines for several specific fuel compositions) 3. 2. 8. 1. 1. Fuel composition: methane (CH4): basis:. % mole min. % mole max. % mole ethane (C2H6): basis:. % mole min. % mole max. % mole propane (C3H8): basis:. % mole min. % mole max. % mole butane (C4H10): basis:. % mole min. % mole max. % mole C5/C5+: basis:. % mole min. % mole max. % mole oxygen (O2): basis:. % mole min. % mole max. % mole inert (N2, He etc. ): basis:. % mole min. % mole max. % mole (1) Strike out what does not apply. (2) Specify the tolerance. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/47 3. 2. 8. 1. 2. Injector(s) 3. 2. 8. 1. 2. 1. Make(s):. 3. 2. 8. 1. 2. 2. Type(s):. 3. 2. 8. 1. 3. Others (if applicablel) 3. 2. 8. 2. Variant 2 (only in the case of approvals for several specific fuel compositions) 4. 4. 1. 4. 2. 5. 5. 1. 5. 2. 5. 2. 1. 5. 2. 2. 5. 3. 5. 4. 5. 5. 5. 5. 1. 5. 5. 2. 5. 5. 3. 5. 6. 5. 6. 1. 5. 6. 2. Valve timing Maximum lift of valves and angles of opening and closing in relation to dead centres of equivalent data:. Reference and/or setting ranges (1):. Ignition system (spark ignition engines only) Ignition system type: common coil and plugs / individual coil on plugs / coil on plug / other (specify) (1) Ignition control unit Make(s):. Type(s):. Ignition advance curve / advance map (1) (2). Ignition timing (2):. degrees before TDC at a speed of. rpm and a MAP of. kPA Spark plugs Make(s):. Type(s):. Gap setting:. mm Ignition coil(s) Make(s):. Type(s):. (1) Strike out what does not apply. (2) Specify the tolerance. C 173/48 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Appendix 4 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE ENGINE-RELATED VEHICLE PARTS 1. 2. 3. 4. Intake system depression at rated engine speed and at 100 % load:. kPa Exhaust system back pressure at rated engine speed and at 100 % load:. kPa Volume of exhaust system:. cm³ Power absorbed by the auxiliaries needed for operating the engine as specified in and under the operation conditions of Directive 80/1269/EEC (1), as last amended by Directive 89/491/EEC (2), Annex I, Section 5. 1. 1. Power absorbed (kW) at various engine speeds Idle Low speed High speed Speed A (1) Speed B (1) Speed C (1) Ref. speed (2) Equipment P(a) needed for Auxiliaries operating the engine (to be subtracted from measured engine power) see Section 5. 1 (1) ESC test. (2) ETC test only. (1) OJ L 375, 31. 12. 1980, p. 46. (2) OJ L 238, 15. 8. 1989, p. 43. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/49 ANNEX III TEST PROCEDURE 1. INTRODUCTION 1. 1. This annex describes the methods of determining emissions of gaseous components, particulates and smoke from the engines to be tested. Three test cycles are described that shall be applied according to the provisions of Annex I, Section 6. 2: — the ESC which consists of a steady state 13-mode cycle, — the ELR which consists of transient load steps at different speeds, which are integral parts of one test procedure, and are run concurrently; — the ETC which consists of a second-by-second sequence of transient modes. 1. 2. The test shall be carried out with the engine mounted on a test bench and connected to a dynamometer. 1. 3. Measurement principle The emissions to be measured from the exhaust of the engine include the gaseous components (carbon monoxide, total hydrocarbons for diesel engines on the ESC test only; non-methane hydrocarbons for diesel and gas engines on the ETC test only; methane for gas engines on the ETC test only and oxides of nitrogen), the particulates (diesel engines only) and smoke (diesel engines on the ELR test only). Additionally, carbon dioxide is often used as a tracer gas for determining the dilution ratio of partial and full flow dilution systems. Good engineering practice recommends the general measurement of carbon dioxide as an excellent tool for the detection of measurement problems during the test run. 1. 3. 1. ESC test During a prescribed sequence of warmed-up engine operating conditions the amounts of the above exhaust emissions shall be examined continuously by taking a sample from the raw exhaust gas. The test cycle consists of a number of speed and power modes which cover the typical operating range of diesel engines. During each mode the concentration of each gaseous pollutant, exhaust flow and power output shall be determined, and the measured values weighted. The particulate sample shall be diluted with conditioned ambient air. One sample over the complete test procedure shall be taken, and collected on suitable filters. The grams of each pollutant emitted per kilowatt hour shall be calculated as described in Appendix 1 to this annex. Additionally, NOx shall be measured at three test points within the control area selected by the Technical Service (1) and the measured values compared to the values calculated from those modes of the test cycle enveloping the selected test points. The NOx control check ensures the effectiveness of the emission control of the engine within the typical engine operating range. 1. 3. 2. ELR test During a prescribed load response test, the smoke of a warmed-up engine shall be determined by means of an opacimeter. The test consists of loading the engine at constant speed from 10 % to 100 % load at three different engine speeds. Additionally, a fourth load step selected by the Technical Service (1) shall be run, and the value compared to the values of the previous load steps. The smoke peak shall be determined using an averaging algorithm, as described in Appendix 1 to this annex. (1) The test points shall be selected using approved statistical methods of randomisation. C 173/50 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 1. 3. 3. ETC test During a prescribed transient cycle of warmed-up engine operating conditions, which is based closely on road-type-specific driving patterns of heavy-duty engines installed in trucks and busses, the above pollutants shall be examined after diluting the total exhaust gas with conditioned ambient air. Using the engine torque and speed feedback signals of the engine dynamometer, the power shall be integrated with respect to time of the cycle resulting in the work produced by the engine over the cycle. The concentration of NOx and HC shall be determined over the cycle by integration of the analyser signal. The concentration of CO, CO2 and NMHC may be determined by integration of the analyser signal or by bag sampling. For particulates, a proportional sample shall be collected on suitable filters. The diluted exhaust gas flow rate shall be determined over the cycle to calculate the mass emission values of the pollutants. The mass emission values shall be related to the engine work to get the grams of each pollutant emitted per kilowatt hour, as described in Appendix 2 to this annex. 2. TEST CONDITIONS 2. 1. Engine test conditions 2. 1. 1. The absolute temperature (Ta) of the engine air at the inlet to the engine expressed in Kelvin, and the dry atmospheric pressure (ps) expressed in kPa shall be measured and the parameter F shall be determined according to the following provisions: (a) for diesel engines: Naturally aspirated and mechanically supercharged engines: F =(99 298)0,7 ps) *( Ta Turbocharged engines with or without cooling of the intake air: ps)0,7 F =(99 298)1,5 *( Ta b) for gas engines: ps)1,2 F =(99 298)0,6 *( Ta 2. 1. 2. Test validity For a test to be recognised as valid, the parameter F shall be such that: 0,96 # F # 1,06 2. 2. Engines with charge air cooling The charge air temperature shall be recorded and shall be, at the speed of the declared maximum power and full load, within 6 5 K of the maximum charge air temperature specified in Annex II, Appendix 1, Section 1. 16. 3. The temperature of the cooling medium shall be at least 293 K (20°C). If a test shop system or external blower is used, the charge air temperature shall be within 6 5 K of the maximum charge air temperature specified in Annex II, Appendix 1, Section 1. 16. 3 at the speed of the declared maximum power and full load. The setting of the charge air cooler for meeting the above conditions shall be used for the whole test cycle. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/51 2. 3. Engine air intake system An engine air intake system shall be used presenting an air intake restriction within 6 300 Pa of the upper limit of the engine operating at the speed at the declared maximum power and full load. 2. 4. Engine exhaust system An exhaust system shall be used presenting an exhaust back pressure within 6 650 Pa of the upper limit of the engine operating at the speed of declared maximum power and full load and a volume within 6 40 % of that specified by the manufacturer. A test shop system may be used, provided it represents actual engine operating conditions. The exhaust system shall conform to the requirements for exhaust gas sampling, as set out in Annex III, Appendix 4, Section 3. 4 and in Annex V, Section 2. 2. 1, EP and Section 2. 3. 1, EP. If the engine is equipped with an exhaust after-treatment device, the exhaust pipe must have the same diameter as found in-use for at least four pipe diameters upstream to the inlet of the beginning of the expansion section containing the after-treatment device. The distance from the exhaust manifold flange or turbocharger outlet to the exhaust after-treatment device shall be the same as in the vehicle configuration or within the distance specifications of the manufacturer. The exhaust backpressure or restriction shall follow the same criteria as above, and may be set with a valve. The after-treatment container may be removed during dummy tests and during engine mapping, and replaced with an equivalent container having an inactive catalyst support. 2. 5. Cooling system An engine cooling system with sufficient capacity to maintain the engine at normal operating temperatures prescribed by the manufacturer shall be used. 2. 6. Lubricating oil specifications of the lubricating oil used for the test shall be recorded and presented with the results of the test, as specified in Annex II, Appendix 1, Section 7. 1. 2. 7. Fuel The fuel shall be the reference fuel specified in Annex IV. The fuel temperature and measuring point shall be specified by the manufacturer within the limits given in Annex II, Appendix 1, Section 1. 16. 5. The fuel temperature shall not be lower than 306 K (33°C). If not specified, it shall be 311 K 6 5 K (38°C 6 5°C) at the inlet to the fuel supply. 2. 8. Testing of exhaust after-treatment systems If the engine is equipped with an exhaust after-treatment system, the emissions measured on the test cycle(s) shall be representative of the emissions in the field. If this cannot be achieved with one single test cycle (for example, for particulate filters with periodic regeneration), several test cycles shall be conducted and the test results averaged and/or weighted. The exact procedure shall be agreed by the engine manufacturer and the Technical Service based upon good engineering judgment. C 173/52 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Appendix 1 ESC AND ELR TEST CYCLES 1. ENGINE AND DYNAMOMETER SETTINGS 1. 1. Determination of engine speeds A, B and C The engine speeds A, B and C shall be declared by the manufacturer in accordance with the following provisions: The high speed nhi shall be determined by calculating 70 % of the declared maximum net power P(n), as determined in Annex II, Appendix 1, Section 8. 2. The highest engine speed where this power value occurs on the power curve is defined as nhi. The low speed nlo shall be determined by calculating 50 % of the declared maximum net power P(n), as determined in Annex II, Appendix 1, Section 8. 2. The lowest engine speed where this power value occurs on the power curve is defined as nlo. The engine speeds A, B and C shall be calculated as follows: Speed A = nlo + 25 % (nhi - nlo) Speed B = nlo + 50 % (nhi - nlo) Speed C = nlo + 75 % (nhi - nlo) The engine speeds A, B and C may be verified by either of the following methods: (a) Additional test points shall be measured during engine power approval according to Directive 80/1269/EEC for an accurate determination of nhi and nlo. The maximum power, nhi and nlo shall be determined from the power curve, and engine speeds A, B and C shall be calculated according to the above provisions. (b) The engine shall be mapped along the full load curve, from maximum no load speed to idle speed, using at least 5 measurement points per 1 000 rpm intervals and measurement points within = 50 rpm of the speed at declared maximum power. The maximum power, nhi and nlo shall be determined from this mapping curve, and engine speeds A, B and C shall be calculated according to the above provisions. If the measured engine speeds A, B and C are within 6 3 % of the engine speeds as declared by the manufacturer, the declared engine speeds shall be used for the emissions test. If the tolerance is exceeded for any of the engine speeds, the measured engine speeds shall be used for the emissions test. 1. 2. Determination of dynamometer settings The torque curve at full load shall be determined by experimentation to calculate the torque values for the specified test modes under net conditions, as specified in Annex II, Appendix 1, Section 8. 2. The power absorbed by engine-driven equipment, if applicable, shall be taken into account. The dynamometer setting for each test mode shall be calculated using the formula: L 100 L 100 s = P(n) * s = P(n) * where: if tested under net conditions + (P(a) – P(b)) if not tested under net conditions s = dynamometer setting, kW P(n) = net engine power as indicated in Annex II, Appendix 1, Section 8. 2. kW L = per cent load as indicated in Section 2. 7. 1. % P(a) = power absorbed by auxiliaries to be fitted as indicated in Annex II, Appendix 1, Section 6. 1 P(b) = power absorbed by auxiliaries to be removed as indicated in Annex II, Appendix 1, Section 6. 2 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/53 2. ESC TEST RUN At the manufacturer’s request, a dummy test may be run for conditioning of the engine and exhaust system before the measurement cycle. 2. 1. Preparation of the sampling filters At least one hour before the test, each filter (pair) shall be placed in a closed, but unsealed petri dish and placed in a weighing chamber for stabilisation. At the end of the stabilisation period, each filter (pair) shall be weighed and the tare weight shall be recorded. The filter (pair) shall then be stored in a closed petri dish or sealed filter holder until needed for testing. If the filter (pair) is not used within eight hours of its removal from the weighing chamber, it must be conditioned and reweighed before use. 2. 2. Installation of the measuring equipment The instrumentation and sample probes shall be installed as required. When using a full flow dilution system for exhaust gas dilution, the tailpipe shall be connected to the system. 2. 3. Starting the dilution system and the engine The dilution system and the engine shall be started and warned up until all temperatures and pressures have stabilised at maximum power according to the recommendation of the manufacturer and good engineering practice. 2. 4. Starting the particulate sampling system The particulate sampling system shall be started and running on by-pass. The particulate background level of the dilution air may be determined by passing dilution air through the particulate filters. It filtered dilution air is used, one measurement may be done prior to or after the test. If the dilution air is not filtered, measurements at the beginning and at the end of the cycle, may be done, and the values averaged. 2. 5. Adjustment of the dilution ratio The dilution air shall be set such that the temperature of the diluted exhaust gas measured immediately prior to the primary filter shall not exceed 325 K (52°C) at any mode. The dilution ratio (q) shall not be less than 4. For systems that use CO2 or NOx concentration measurement for dilution ratio control, the CO2 or NOx content of the dilution air must be measured at the beginning and at the end of each test. The pre- and post test background CO2 or NOx concentration measurements of the dilution air must be within 100 ppm or 5 ppm of each other, respectively. 2. 6. Checking the analysers The emission analysers shall be set at zero and spanned. 2. 7. Test cycle 2. 7. 1. The following 13-mode cycle shall be followed in dynamometer operation on the test engine: C 173/54 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Mode number Engine speed Percent load Weighting factor Mode length 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 idle A B B A A A B B C C C C — 100 50 75 50 75 25 100 25 100 25 75 50 0,15 0,08 0,10 0,10 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,09 0,10 0,08 0,05 0,05 0,05 4 minutes 2 minutes 2 minutes 2 minutes 2 minutes 2 minutes 2 minutes 2 minutes 2 minutes 2 minutes 2 minutes 2 minutes 2 minutes 2. 7. 2. Test sequence The test sequence shall be started. The test shall be performed in the order of the mode numbers as set out in Section 2. 7. 1. The engine must be operated for the prescribed time in each mode, completing engine speed and load changes in the first 20 seconds. The specified speed shall be held to within 6 50 rpm and the specified torque shall be held to within 6 2 % of the maximum torque at the test speed. At the manufacturer’s request, the test sequence may be repeated a sufficient number of times for sampling more particulate mass on the filter. The manufacturer shall supply a detailed description of the data evaluation and calculation procedures. The gaseous emissions shall only be determined on the first cycle. 2. 7. 3. Analyser response The output of the analysers shall be recorded on a strip chart recorder or measured with an equivalent data acquisition system with the exhaust gas flowing through the analysers throughout the test cycle. 2. 7. 4. Particulate sampling One pair of filters (primary and back-up filters, see Annex III, Appendix 4) shall be used for the complete test procedure. The modal weighting factors specified in the test cycle procedure shall be taken into account by taking a sample proportional to the exhaust mass flow during each individual mode of the cycle. This can be achieved by adjusting sample flow rate, sampling time, and/or dilution ratio, accordingly, so that the criterion for the effective weighting factors in Section 5. 6 is met. The sampling time per mode must be at least 4 seconds per 0,01 weighting factor. Sampling must be conducted as late as possible within each mode. Particulate sampling shall be completed no earlier than 5 seconds before the end of each mode. 2. 7. 5. Engine conditions The engine speed and load, intake air temperature and depression, exhaust temperature and backpressure, fuel flow and air or exhaust flow, charge air temperature, fuel temperature and humidity shall be recorded during each mode, with the speed and load requirements (see Section 2. 7. 2) being met during the time of particulate sampling, but in any case during the last minute of each mode. Any additional data required for calculation shall be recorded (see Sections 4 and 5). 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/55 2. 7. 6. NOx check within the control area The NOx check within the control area shall be performed immediately upon completion of mode 13. The engine shall be conditioned at mode 13 for a period of three minutes before the start of the measurements. Three measurements shall be made at different locations within the control area, selected by the Technical Service (1). The time for each measurement shall be 2 minutes. The measurement procedure is identical to the NOx measurement on the 13-mode cycle, and shall be carried out in accordance with Sections 2. 7. 3, 2. 7. 5, and 4. 1 of this Appendix, and Annex III, Appendix 4, Section 3. The calculation shall be carried out in accordance with Section 4. 2. 7. 7. Rechecking the analysers After the emission test a zero gas and the same span gas shall be used for rechecking. The test will be considered acceptable if the difference between the pre-test and post-test results is less than 2 % of the span gas value. 3. ELR TEST RUN 3. 1. Installation of the measuring equipment The opacimeter and sample probes, if applicable, shall be installed after the muffler or any after-treatment device, if fitted, according to the general installation procedures specified by the instrument manufacturer. Additionally, the requirements of Section 10 of ISO IDS 11614 shall be observed, where appropriate. Prior to any zero and full scale checks, the opacimeter shall be warmed up and stabilised according the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations. If the opacimeter is equipped with a purge air system to prevent sooting of the meter optics, this system shall also be activated and adjusted according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. 2. Checking of the opacimeter The zero and full scale checks shall be made in the opacity readout mode, since the opacity scale offers two truly definable calibration points, namely 0 % opacity and 100 % opacity. The light absorption coefficient is then correctly calculated based upon the measured opacity and the LA, as submitted by the opacimeter manufacturer, when the instrument is returned to the k readout mode for testing. With no blockage of the opacimeter light beam, the readout shall be adjusted to 0,0 % 6 1,0 % opacity. With the light being prevented form reaching the receiver, the readout shall be adjusted to 100,0 % 6 1,0 % opacity. 3. 3. Test cycle 3. 3. 1. Conditioning of the engine Warming up of the engine and the system shall be at maximum power in order to stabilise the engine parameters according to the recommendation of the manufacturer. The preconditioning phase should also protect the actual measurement against the influence of deposits in the exhaust system from a former test. When the engine is stabilised, the cycle shall be started within 20 6 2 s after the preconditioning phase. At the manufacturers request, a dummy test may be run for additional conditioning before the measurement cycle. (1) The test points shall be selected using approved statistical methods of randomisation. C 173/56 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 3. 3. 2. Test sequence The test consists of a sequence of three load steps at each of the three engine speeds A (cycle 1), B (cycle 2) and C (cycle 3) determined in accordance with Annex III, Section 1. 1, followed by cycle 4 at a speed within the control area and a load between 10 % and 100 %, selected by the Technical Service (1). The following sequence shall be followed in dynamometer operation on the test engine, as shown in Figure 3. Figure 3 Sequence of ELR test Cycle 1 Cycle 2 Cycle 3 Cycle 4 Selected point Speed C B A 100 % Load 10 % (a) The engine shall be operated at engine speed A and 10 per cent load for 20 6 2 s. The specified speed shall be held to within 6 20 rpm and the specified torque shall be held to within 6 2 % of the maximum torque at the test speed. (b) At the end of the previous segment, the speed control lever shall be moved rapidly to, and held in, the wide open position for 10 6 1 s. The necessary dynamometer load shall be applied to keep the engine speed within 150 rpm during the first 3 s, and within 6 20 rpm during the rest of the segment. (c) The sequence described in (a) and (b) shall be repeated two times. (d) Upon completion of the third load step, the engine shall be adjusted to engine speed B and 10 per cent load within 20 6 2 s. (e) The sequence (a) to (c) shall be run with the engine operating at engine speed B. (f) Upon completion of the third load step, the engine shall be adjusted to engine speed C and 10 per cent load within 20 6 2 s. (g) The sequence (a) to (c) shall be run with the engine operating at engine speed C. (h) Upon completion of the third load step, the engine shall be adjusted to the selected engine speed and any load above 10 % within 20 6 2 s. (i) The sequence (a) to (c) shall be run with the engine operating at the selected engine speed. 3. 4. Cycle validation The relative standard deviations of the means smoke values at each test speed (SVA, SVB, SVC, as calculated in accordance with Section 6. 3. 3 of this appendix from the three successive load steps at each test speed) shall be lower than 15 % of the mean value, or 10 % of the limit value shown in Table 1 of Annex I, whichever is greater. If the difference is greater, the sequence shall be repeated until 3 successive load steps meet the validation criteria. (1) The test points shall be selected using approved statistical methods of randomisation. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/57 3. 5. Rechecking of the opacimeter The post-test opacimeter zero drift value shall not exceed 6 5,0 % of the limit value shown in Table 1 of Annex I. 4. CALCULATION OF THE GASEOUS EMISSIONS 4. 1. Data evaluation For the evaluation of the gaseous emissions, the chart reading of the last 30 seconds of each mode shall be averaged, and the average concentrations (conc) of HC, CO and NOx during each mode shall be determined from the average chart readings and the corresponding calibration data. A different type of recording can be used if it ensures an equivalent data acquisition. For the NOx check within the control area, the above requirements apply for NOx only. The exhaust gas flow GEXHW or the diluted exhaust gas flow GTOTW, if used optionally, shall be determined in accordance with Annex III, Appendix 4, Section 2. 3. 4. 2. Dry/wet/correction The measured concentration shall be converted to a wet basis according to the following formulae, if not already measured on a wet basis. conc(wet) = Kw * conc(dry) For the raw exhaust gas: KW,r =(1 − FFH * GFUEL GAIRD) − KW2 and, FFH = 1,969 (1 + GFUEL GAIRW) For the diluted exhaust gas: KW,e,1 =(1 − HTCRAT * CO2%(wet) 200 ) − KW1 or, KW,e,2 =( (1 − KW1) 1 + HTCRAT * CO2%(dry) 200 ) For the dilution air KW,d = 1 − KW1 KW1 = 1,608 * Hd 1 000 + (1,608 * Hd) Hd = 6,220 * Rd * pd pB − pd * Rd * 10−2 where, For the intake air (if different from the dilution air) KW,a = 1 − KW2 KW2 = 1,608 * Ha 1 000 + (1,608 * Ha) Ha = 6,220 * Ra * pa pB − pa * Ra * 10−2 Ha, Hd = g water per kg dry air Rd, Ra = relative humidity of the dilution/intake air, % pd, pa = saturation vapour pressure of the dilution/intake air, kPa, pB = total barometric pressure, kPa C 173/58 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 4. 3. NOx correction for humidity and Temperature As the NOx emission depends on ambient air conditions, the NOx concentration shall be corrected for ambient air temperature and humidity with the factors given in the following formulae. KH,D = 1 1 + A * (Ha − 10,71) + B * (Ta − 298) with: = −0,209 GFUEL/GAIRD + 0,00954 A = 0,309 GFUEL/GAIRD − 0,0266 B Ta = temperature of the air, K Ha = humidity of the intake air, g water per kg dry air in which. Ha = 6,220 * Ra * pa (pB − pa) * Ra * 10−2 Ra = relative humidity of the intake air, % pa = saturation vapour pressure of the intake air, kPa pB = total barometric pressure, kPa 4. 4. Calculation of the emission mass flow rates The emission mass flow rates (g/h) for each mode shall be calculated as follows, assuming the exhaust gas density to be 1,293 kg/m³ at 273 K (0°C) and 101,3 kPa: (1) NOx mass = 0,001587 * NOx conc * KH,D * GEXHW (2) COmass = 0,000966 * COconc * GEXHW (3) HCmass = 0,000479 * HCconc * GEXHW where NOx conc, COconc, HCconc (1) are the average concentrations (ppm) in the raw exhaust gas, as determined in Section 4. 1. If, optionally, the gaseous emissions are determined with a full flow dilution system, the following formulae shall be applied: (1) NOx mass = 0,001587 * NOx conc * KH,D * GTOTW (2) COmass = 0,000966 * COconc * GTOTW (3) HCmass = 0,000479 * HCconc * GTOTW where NOx conc, COconc, HCconc (1) are the average background corrected concentrations (ppm) of each mode in the diluted exhaust gas, as determined in Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 4. 3. 1. 1. 4. 5. Calculation of the specific emissions The emissions (g/kWh) shall be calculated for all individual components in the following way: NOx = Σ NOx, mass * WFi Σ P(n)i * WFi CO = Σ COmass * WFi Σ P(n)i * WFi HC = Σ HCmass * WFi Σ P(n)i * WFi The weighting factors (WF) used in the above calculation are according to Section 2. 7. 1. (1) Based on C1 equivalent. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/59 4. 6. Calculation of the area control values For the three control points selected according in Section 2. 7. 6. the NOx emission shall be measured and calculated according to Section 4. 6. 1 and also determined by interpolation from the modes of the test cycle closest to the respective control point according to Section 4. 6. 2. The measured values are then compared to the interpolated values according to Section 4. 6. 3. 4. 6. 1. Calculation of the specific emission The NOx emission for each of the control points (Z) shall be calculated as follows: NOx mass,Z = 0,001587 * NOx conc,Z * KH,D * GEXHW NOx,Z = NOx mass,Z/P(n)Z 4. 6. 2. Determination of the emission value from the test cycle The NOx emission for each of the control points shall be interpolated from the four closest modes of the test cycle that envelop the selected control point Z as shown in Figure 4. For these modes (R. S. T. U), the following definitions apply: Speed(R) Speed(S) Per cent load(R) Per cent load(T) = Speed(T) = nRT = Speed(U) = nSU = Per cent load(S) = Per cent load(U). The NOx emission of the selected control point Z shall be calculated as follows: EZ = ERS + (ETU − ERS) · (MZ − MRS) / (MTU − MRS) and: where. ETU = ET + (EU − ET) · (nZ − nRT) / (nSU − nRT) ERS = ER + (ES − ER) · (nZ − nRT) / (nSU − nRT) MTU = MT + (MU − MT) · (nZ − nRT) / (nSU − nRT) MRS = MR + (MS − MR) · (nZ − nRT) / (nSU − nRT) ER, ES, ET, EU = specific NOx emission of the enveloping modes calculated in accordance with Section 4. 6. 1. MR, MS, MT, MU = engine torque of the enveloping modes Figure 4 Interpolation of NOx control point Torque Speed Z C 173/60 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 4. 6. 3. Comparison of NOx emission values The measured specific NOx emission of the control point Z (NOx,Z) is compared to the interpolated value (EZ) as follows: NOx,diff = 100 * (NOx,z − Ez) / Ez 5. CALCULATION OF THE PARTICULATE EMISSION 5. 1. Data evaluation For the evaluation of the particulates, the total sample masses (MSAM,i) through the filters shall be recorded for each mode. The filters shall be returned to the weighing chamber and conditioned for at least one hour, but not more than 80 hours, and then weighed. The gross weight of the filters shall be recorded and the tare weight (see Section 2. 1 of this Appendix) subtracted. The particulate mass Mf is the sum of the particulate masses collected on the primary and back-up filters. If background correction is to be applied, the dilution air mass (MDIL) through the filters and the particulate mass (Md) shall be recorded. If more than one measurement was made, the quotient Md/MDIL must be calculated for each single measurement and the values averaged. 5. 2. Partial flow dilution system The final reported test results of the particulate emission shall be determined through the following steps. Since various types of dilution rate control may be used, different calculation methods for GEDFW apply. All calculations shall be based upon the average values of the individual modes during the sampling period. 5. 2. 1. Isokinetic systems GEDFW,i = GEXHW,i * qi qi = GDILW,i + (GEXHW,i * r) (GEXHW,i * r) where r corresponds to the ratio of the cross sectional areas of the isokinetic probe and the exhaust pipe: 5. 2. 2. Systems with measurement of CO2 or NOx concentration r = Ap AT GEDFW,i = GEXHW,i * qi qi = concE,i − concA,i concD,i − concA,i where. concE = wet concentration of the tracer gas in the raw exhaust concD = wet concentration of the tracer gas in the diluted exhaust concA = wet concentration of the tracer gas in the dilution air Concentrations measured on a dry basis shall be converted to a wet basis according to Section 4. 2 of this appendix. 5. 2. 3. Systems with CO2 measurement and carbon balance method (1) GEDFW,i = 206,5 * GFUEL,i CO2D,i − CO2A,i where, CO2D = CO2 concentration of the diluted exhaust CO2A = CO2 concentration of the dilution air (concentracions in Vol % on wet basis) (1) The value is only valid for the reference fuel specified in Annex IV. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/61 This equation is based upon the carbon balance assumption (carbon atoms supplied to the engine are emitted as CO2) and determined through the following steps: and, GEDFW,i = GEXHW,i * qi qi = 206,5 * GFUEL,i GEXHW,i * (CO2D,i − CO2A,i) 5. 2. 4. Systems with flow measurement GEDFW,i = GEXHW,i * qi qi = GTOTW,i (GTOTW,i − GDILW,i) 5. 3. Full flow dilution system The reported test results of the particulate emission shall be determined through the following steps. All calculation shall be based upon the average values of the individual modes during the sampling period. GEDFW,i = GTOTW,i 5. 4. Calculation of the particulate mass flow rate The particulate mass flow rate shall be calculated as follows: PTmass = Mf MSAM * GEDFW 1000 where GEDFW = Σi = n i = 1 GEDFW,i * WFi MSAM = Σi = n i = 1 MSAM,i i = 1,. n determined over the test cycle by summation of the average values of the individual modes during the sampling period. The particulate mass flow rate may be background corrected as follows: PTmass =[ Mf MSAM −( Md MDIL *( Σi = n i = 1(1 − 1 DFi) * WFi))] * GEDFW 1000 If more than one measurement is made. (Md/MDIL) shall be replaced with (Md/MDIL). DFi = 13,4/(concCO2 + (concCO + concHC)*10−4)) for the individual modes or, DFi = 13,4/concCO2 for the individual modes. 5. 5. Calculation of the specific emission The particulate emission shall be calculated in the following way: PT = PTmass Σ P(n)i * WFi C 173/62 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 5. 6. Effective weighting factor The effective weighting factor WFE,i for each mode shall be calculated in the following way: WFE,i = MSAM,i * GEDFW MSAM * GEDFW,i The value of the effective weighting factors shall be within 6 0,003 (6 0,005 for the idle mode) of the weighting factors listed in Section 2. 7. 1. 6. 6. 1. CALCULATION OF THE SMOKE VALUES Bessel algorithm The Bessel algorithm shall be used to compute the l s average values from the instantaneous smoke readings, converted in accordance with Section 6. 3. 1. The algorithm emulates a low pass second order filter, and its use requires iterative calculations to determine the coefficients. These coefficients are a function of the response time of the opacimeter system and the sampling rate. Therefore, Section 6. 1. 1 must be repeated whenever the system response time and/or sampling rate changes. 6. 1. 1. Calculation of filter response time and Bessel constants The required Bessel response time (tF) is a function of the physical and electrical response times of the opacimeter system, as specified in Annex III, Appendix 4, Section 5. 2. 4, and shall be calculated by the following equation: tF = ˛1 − (t2 e) p + t2 where, tp = physical response time, s te = electrical response time, s The calculations for estimating the filter cut-off frequency (fc) are based on a step input 0 to 1 in , 0,01 s (see Annex VII). The response time as defined as the time between when the Bessel output reaches 10 % (t10) and when it reaches 90 % (t90) of this step function. This must be obtained by iterating on fc until t90−t10<tF. The first iteration for fc is given by the following formula: fc = ð / (10 * tF) The Bessel constants E and K shall be calculated by the following equations: E = 1 1 + Ω * ˛3 * D + D * Ω2 K = 2 * E * (D * Ω2 − 1) − 1 where: D = 0,618034 ∆t = 1 / sampling rate Ω = 1 / [tan(ð * ∆t * fc)]. 6. 1. 2. Caculation of the Bessel algorithm Using the values of E and K, the 1 s Bessel averaged response to a step input Si shall be calculated as follows: Yi = Yi−1 + E * (Si + 2 * Si−1 + Si−2 − 4 * Yi−2) + K * (Yi−1 − Yi−2) where Si−2 = Si−1 = 0 Si = 1 Yi−2 = Yi−1 = 0 The times t10 and t90 shall be interpolated. The difference in time between t90 and t10 defines the response time tF for that value of fc. If this response time is not close enough to the required response time, iteration shall be cotinued until the actual response time is within 1 % of the required response as follows: x(t90 − t10) − tFx # 0,01 * tF 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/63 6. 2. Data evaluation The smoke measurement values shall be sampled with a minimum rate of 20 Hz. 6. 3. Determination of smoke 6. 3. 1. Data conversion Since the basic measurement unit of all opacimeters is transmittance, the smoke values shall be converted from transmittance (ô) to the light absorption coefficient (k) as follows: k = − 1 LA * ln (1 − N 100) N = 100 − ô and where, k = light absorption coefficient, m−1 LA = effective optical path lenght, as submitted by instrument manufacturer, m N = opacity, % ô = transmittance, % The conversion shall be applied, before any further data processing is made. 6. 3. 2. Calculation of Bessel averaged smoke The proper cut-off frequency fc is the one that produces the required filter response time tF. Once this frequency has been determined through the iterative process of section 6. 1. 1. the proper Bessel algorithm constants E and K shall be calculated. The Bessel algorithm shall then be applied to the instantaneous smoke trace (k-value), as described in Section 6. 1. 2: Yi = Yi−1 + E * (Si + 2 * Si−1 + Si−2 − 4 * Yi−2) + K * (Yi−1 − Yi−2) The Bessel algorithm is recursive in nature. Thus, it needs some initial input values of Si−1 and Si−2 and initial output values Yi−1 and Yi−2 to get the algorithm started. These my be assumed to be 0. For each load step of the three speeds A, B and C, the maximum 1 s value Ymax shall be selected from the individual Yi values of each smoke trace. 6. 3. 3. Final result The mean smoke values (SV) from each cycle (test speed) shall be calculated as follows: For test speed A: For test speed B: For test speed C: where, SVA = (Ymax1,A + Ymax2,A + Ymax3,A) / 3 SVB = (Ymax1,B + Ymax2,B + Ymax3,B) / 3 SVC = (Ymax1,C + Ymax2,C + Ymax3,C) / 3 Ymax1, Ymax2, Ymax3 = highest 1 s Bessel averaged smoke value at each of the three load steps The final value shall be calculated as follows: SV = (0,43 * SVA) + (0,56 * SVB) + (0,01 * SVC) C 173/64 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Appendix 2 ETC TEST CYCLE 1. ENGINE MAPPING PROCEDURE 1. 1. Determination of the mapping speed range For generating the ETC on the test cell, the engine needs to be mapped prior to the test cycle for determining the speed vs. torque curve. The minimum and maximum mapping speeds are defined as follows: Minimum mapping speed = idle speed Maximum mapping speed = nhi * 1,02 or speed where full load torque drops off to zero, whichever is lower 1. 2. Performing the engine power map The engine shall be warmed up at maximum power in order to stabilise the engine parameters according to the recommendation of the manufacturer and good engineering practice. When the engine is stabilised, the engine map shall be performed as follows: (a) The engine shall be unloaded and operated at idle speed. (b) The engine shall be operated at full load setting of the injection pump at minimum mapping speed. (c) The engine speed shall be increased at an average rate of 8 6 1 min–1/s from minimum to maximum mapping speed. Engine speed and torque points shall be recorded at a sample rate of a least one point per second. 1. 3. Mapping curve generation All data points recorded under Section 1. 2 shall be connected using linear interpolation between points. The resulting torque curve is the mapping curve and shall be used to convert the normalised torque values of the engine cycle into actual torque values for the test cycle, as described in Section 2. 1. 4. Alternate mapping If a manufacturer believes that the above mapping techniques are unsafe or unrepresentative for any given engine, alternate mapping techniques may be used. These alternate techniques must satisfy the intent of the specified mapping procedures to determine the maximum available torque at all engine speeds achieved during the test cycles. Deviations from the mapping techniques specified in this section for reasons of safety or representativeness shall be approved by the Technical Service along with the justification for their use. In no case, however, shall descending continual sweeps of engine speed be used for governed or turbocharged engines. 1. 5. Replicate tests An engine need not be mapped before each and every test cycle. An engine shall be remapped prior to a test cycle if: — an unreasonable amount of time has transpired since the last map, as determined by engineering judgment, or, — physical changes or recalibrations have been made to the engine which may potentially affect engine performance. 2. GENERATION OF THE REFERENCE TEST CYCLE The transient test cycle is described in Appendix 3 to this annex. The normalised values for torque and speed shall be changed to the actual values, as follows, resulting in the reference cycle. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/65 2. 1. Actual speed The speed shall be unnormalised using the following equation: Actual speed = % speed (reference speed − idle speed) 100 + idle speed The reference speed (nref) corresponds to the 100 % speed values specified in the engine dynamometer schedule of Appendix 3. It is defined as follows (see Figure 1 of Annex I): nref = nlo + 95 % * (nhi – nlo) where nhi and nlo are either specified according to Annex I. Section 2 or determined according to Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 1. 1 2. 2. Actual torque The torque is normalised to the maximum torque at the respective speed. The torque values of the reference cycle shall be unnormalised, using the mapping curve determined according to Section 1. 3, as follows: Actual torque = %torque * max. torque 100 for the respective actual speed as determined in Section 2. 1. The negative torque values of the motoring points (‘m’) shall take on, for purposes of reference cycle generation, unnormalised values determined in either of the following ways: — negative 40 % of the positive torque available at the associated speed point; — mapping of the negative torque required to motor the engine from minimum to maximum mapping speed; — determination of the negative torque required to motor the engine at idle and reference speeds and linear interpolation between these two points. 2. 3. Example of the unnormalisation procedure As an example, the following test point shall be unnormalised: % speed = 43 % torque = 82 Given the following values: reference speed = 2 200 min−1 = 600 min−1 idle speed results in, actual speed = 43 * (2 200 – 600) 100 + 600 = 1 288 min−1 actual torque = 82 * 700 100 = 574 Nm where the maximum torque observed from the mapping curve at 1 288 min−1 is 700 Nm. 3. EMISSIONS TEST RUN At the manufacturer’s request, a dummy test may be run for conditioning of the engine and exhaust system before the measurement cycle. NG and LPG fuelled engines shall be run-in using the ETC test. The engine shall be run over a minimum of two ETC cycles and until the CO emission measured over one ETC cycle does not exceed by more than, 10 % the CO emission measured over the previous ETC cycle. C 173/66 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 3. 1. Preparation of the sampling filters (diesel engines only) At least one hour before the test, each filter (pair) shall be placed in a closed, but unsealed petri dish and placed in a weighing chamber for stabilisation. At the end of the stabilisation period, each filter (pair) shall be weighed and the tare weight shall be recorded. The filter (pair) shall then be stored in a closed petri dish or sealed filter holder until needed for testing. If the filter (pair) is not used within eight hours of its removal from the weighing chamber, it must be conditioned and reweighed before use. 3. 2. Installation of the measuring equipment The instrumentation and sample probes shall be installed as required. The tailpipe shall be connected to the full flow dilution system. 3. 3. Starting the dilution system and the engine The dilution system and the engine shall be started and warmed up until all temperatures and pressures have stabilised at maximum power according to the recommendation of the manufacturer and good engineering practice. 3. 4. Starting the particulate sampling system (diesel engines only) The particulate sampling system shall be started and running on by-pass. The particulate background level of the dilution air may be determined by passing dilution air through the particulate filters. If filtered dilution air is used, one measurement may be done prior to or after the test. If the dilution air is not filtered, measurements at the beginning and at the end of the cycle, may be done, and the values averaged. 3. 5. Adjustment of the full flow dilution system The total diluted exhaust gas flow be set to eliminate water condensation in the system, and to obtain a maximum filter face temperature of 325 K (52° C) or less (see Annex V, Section 2. 3. 1, DT). 3. 6. Checking the analysers The emission analysers shall be set at zero and spanned. If sample bags are used, they shall be evacuated. 3. 7. Engine starting procedure The stabilised engine shall be started according to the manufacturer’s recommended starting procedure in the owner’s manual, using either a production starter motor or the dynamometer. Optionally, the test may start directly from the engine preconditioning phase without shutting the engine off, when the engine has reached the idle speed. 3. 8. Test cycle 3. 8. 1. Test sequence The test sequence shall be started, if the engine has reached idle speed. The test shall be performed according to the reference cycle as set out in Section 2 of this appendix. Engine speed and torque command set points shall be issued at 5 Hz (10 Hz recommended) or greater. Feedback engine speed and torque shall be recorded at least once every second during the test cycle, and the signals may be electronically filtered. 3. 8. 2. Analyser response At the start of the engine or test sequence, if the cycle is started directly from the preconditioning, the measuring equipment shall be started, simultaneously: — start collecting or analysing diltution air; — start collecting or analysing diluted exhaust gas; — start measuring the amount of diluted exhaust gas (CVS) and the required temperatures and pressures; — start recording the feedback data of speed and torque of the dynamometer. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/67 HC and NOx shall be measured continuously in the dilution tunnel with a frequency of 2 Hz. The average concentrations shall be determined by integrating the analyser signals over the test cycle. The system response time shall be no greater than 20 s, and shall be coordinated with CVS flow fluctuations and sampling time/test cycle offsets, if necessary. CO, CO2, NMHC and CH4 shall be determined by integration or by analysing the concentrations in the sample bag, collected over the cycle. The concentrations of the gaseous pollutants in the dilution air shall be determined by integration or by collecting into the background bag. All other values shall be recorded with a minimum of one measurement per second (1 Hz). 3. 8. 3. Particulate sampling (diesel engines only) At the start of the engine or test sequence, if the cycle is started directly from the preconditioning, the particulate sampling system shall be switched from by-pass to collecting particulates. If now flow compensation is used, the sample pump(s) shall be adjusted so that the flow rate through the particulate sample probe or transfer tube is maintained at a value within 6 5 % of the set flow rate. If flow compensation (i. e. , proportional control of sample flow) is used, it must be demonstrated that the ratio of main tunnel flow to particulate sample flow does not change by more than 6 5 % of its set value (except for the first 10 seconds of sampling). Note: For double dilution operation, sample flow is the net difference between the flow rate through the sample filters and the secondary dilution air flow rate. The average temperature and pressure at the gas meter(s) or flow instrumentation inlet shall be recorded. If the set flow rate cannot be maintained over the complete cycle (within 6 5 %) because of high particulate loading on the filter, the test shall be voided. The test shall be rerun using a lower flow rate and/or a larger diameter filter. 3. 8. 4. Engine stalling If the engine stalls anywhere during the test cycle, the engine shall be preconditioned and restarted, and the test repeated. If a malfunction occurs in any of the required test equipment during the test cycle, the test shall be voided. 3. 8. 5. Operations after test At the completion of the test, the measurement of the diluted exhaust gas volume, the gas flow into the collecting bags and the particulate sample pump shall be stopped. For an integrating analyser system, sampling shall continue until system response times have elapsed. The concentrations of the collecting bags, if used, shall be analysed as soon as possible and in any case not later than 20 minutes after the end of the test cycle. After the emission test, a zero gas and the same span gas shall be used for re-checking the analysers. The test will be considered acceptable if the difference between the pre-test and post-test results is less than 2 % of the span gas value. For diesel engines only, the particulate filters shall be returned to the weighing chamber no later than one hour after completion of the test and shall be conditioned in a closed, but unsealed petri dish for at least one hour, but not more than 80 hours before weighing. 3. 9. Verification of the test run 3. 9. 1. Data shift To minimise the biasing effect of the time lag between the feedback and reference cycle values, the entire engine speed and torque feedback signal sequence may be advanced or delayed in time with respect to the reference speed and torque sequence. If the feedback signals are shifted, both speed and torque must be shifted the same amount in the same direction. C 173/68 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 3. 9. 2. Calculation of the cycle work The actual cycle work Wact (kWh) shall be calculated using each pair of engine feedback speed and torque values recorded. This shall be done after any feedback data shift has occurred, if this option is selected. The actual cycle work Wact is used for comparison to the reference cycle work Wref and for calculating the brake specific emissions (see Sections 4. 4 and 5. 2). The same methodology shall be used for integrating both reference and actual engine power. If values are to be determined between adjacent reference or adjacent measured values, linear interpolation shall be used. In integrating the reference and actual cycle work, all negative torque values shall be set equal to zero and included. If integration is performed at a frequency of less than 5 Hertz, and if, during a given time segment, the torque value changes from positive to negative or negative to positive, the negative portion shall be computed and set equal to zero. The positive portion shall be included in the integrated value. Wact shall be between minus 15 % and + 15 % of Wref. 3. 9. 3. Validation statistics of the test cycle Linear regressions of the feedback values on the reference values shall be performed for speed, torque and power. This shall be done after any feedback data shift has occured, if this option is selected. The method of least squares shall be used, with the best fit equation having the form: where: y = mx + b y = feedback (actual) value of speed (min−1), torque (Nm), or power (kW), m = slope of the regression line x = reference value of speed (min−1), torque (Nm), or power (kW), b = y intercept of the regression line The standard error of estimate (SE) of y on x and the coefficient of determination (r²) shall be calculated for each regression line. It is recommended that this analysis be performed at 1 Hertz. All negative reference torque values and the associated feedback values shall be deleted from the calculation of cycle torque and power validation statistics. For a test to be considered valid, the criteria of Table 6 must be met. Table 6 Regression line tolerances Standard error of estimate (SE) of Y on X Slope of the regression line, m Coefficient of determination, r² Y intercept of the regression line, b Speed Torque Power max. 100 min−1 max. 13 % of power map maximum engine torque max. 8 % of power map maximum engine power 0,95 to 1,03 0,83 — 1,03 0,89 — 1,03 min. 0,9700 min. 0,8800 min. 0,9100 6 50 min−1 6 20 Nm or 6 2 % max. torque whichever is greater 6 4 kW or 6 2 % of max. power whichever is greater Point deletions from the regression analyses are permitted where noted in Table 7. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/69 Table 7 Permitted point deletions from regression analysis Conditions Points to be deleted Full load and torque feedback , torque reference Torque and/or power No load, not an idle point, and torque feedback. torque reference Torque and/or power 4. CALCULATION OF THE GASEOUS EMISSIONS 4. 1. Determination of the diluted exhaust gas flow The total diluted exhaust gas flow over the cycle (kg/test) shall be calculated from the measurement values over the cycle and the corresponding calibration data of the flow measurement device (V0 for PDP or KV for CFV, as determined in Annex III, Appendix 5, Section 2). The following formulae shall be applied, if the temperature of the diluted exhaust is kept constant over the cycle by using a heat exchanger (6 6 K for a PDP-CVS, 6 11 K for a CFV-CVS, see Annex V, Section 2. 3). For the PDP-CVS system: MTOTW = 1,293 * V0 * Np * (pB – p1) * 273 / (101,3 * T) where: = volume of gas pumped per revolution under test conditions, m³/rev = MTOTW = mass of the diluted exhaust gas on wet basis over the cycle, kg V0 NP pB p1 T = pressure depression below atmospheric at pump inlet, kPa = atmospheric pressure in the test cell, kPa total revolutions of pump per test = average temperature of the diluted exhaust gas at pump inlet over the cycle, K For the CFV-CVS system: MTOTW = 1,293 * t * Kv * pA / T0,5 where: MTOTW = mas of the diluted exhaust gas on wet basis over the cycle, kg t = cycle time, s Kv pA T = calibration coefficient of the critical flow venturi for standard conditions. = absolute pressure at venturi inlet, kPa = absolute temperature at venturi inlet, K If a system with flow compensation is used (i. e. without heat exchanger), the instantaneous mass emissions shall be calculated and integrated over the cycle. In this case, the instantaneous mass of the diluted exhaust gas shall be calculated as follows. For the PDP-CVS system: MTOTW,i = 1,293 * V0 * Np,i * (pB – p1) * 273 / (101,3 · T) where, MTOTW,i = Np,i = instantaneous mass of the diluted exhaust gas on wet basis, kg total revolutions of pump per time interval For the CFV-CVS system: MTOTW,i = 1,293 * ∆ti * Kv * pA / T0,5 C 173/70 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 where, MTOTW,i = ∆ti = instantaneous mass of the diluted exhaust gas on wet basis, kg time interval, s If the total sample mass of particulates (MSAM) and gaseous pollutants exceeds 0,5 % of the total CVS flow (MTOTW), the CVS flow shall be correctd for MSAM or the particulate sample flow shall be returned to the CVS prior to the flow measuring device (PDP or CFV). 4. 2. NOx Correction for humidity As the NOx emission depends on ambient air conditions, the NOx concentration shall be corrected for ambient air humidity with the factors given in the following formulae. (a) for diesel engines: (b) for gas engines: where, KH,D = 1 1-0,0182 * (Ha − 10,71) KH,G = 1 1-0,0329 * (Ha − 10,71) Ha = humidity of the intake air water per kg dry air Ha = 6,220 * Ra * pa pB - pa * Ra * 10−2 in which, Ra = relative humidity of the intake air, % pa = saturation vapour pressure of the intake air, kPa pB = total barometric pressure, kPa 4. 3. Calculation of the emission mass flow 4. 3. 1. Systems with constant mass flow For systems with heat exchanger, the mass of the pollutants (g/test) shall be determined from the following equations: (1) NOx mass = 0,001587 * NOx conc * KH,D * MTOTW (diesel engines) (2) NOx mass = 0,001587 * NOx conc * KH, G * MTOTW (gas engines) (3) COmass = 0,000966 * COconc * MTOTW (4) HCmass = 0,000479 * HCconc * MTOTW (diesel engines) (5) HCmass = 0,000502 * HCconc * MTOTW (LPG fuelled engines) (6) NMHCmass = 0,000516 * NMHCconc * MTOTW (NG fuelled engines) (7) CH4 mass = 0,000552 * CH4 conc * MTOTW (NG fuelled engines) where, NOx conc, COconc, HCconc (1), NMHCconc = average background corrected concentrations over the cycle from integration (mandatory for NOx and HC) or bag measurement, ppm MTOTW = total mass of diluted exhaust gas over the cycle as determined in Section 4. 1, kg KH,D KH,G = humidity correction factor for diesel engines as determined in Section 4. 2 = humidity correction factor for gas engines as determined in Section 4. 2 (1) Based on C1 equivalent. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/71 Concentrations measured on a dry basis shall be converted to a wet basis in accordance with Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 4. 2. The determination of NMHCconc depends on the method used (see Annex III, Appendix 4, Section 3. 3. 4). In both cases, the CH4 concentration shall be determined and substracted from the HC concentration as follows: (a) GC method (b) NMC method NMHCconc = HCconc – CH4 conc NMHCconc = HC(w / oCutter) * (1 – CEM) – HC(wCutter) CEE – CEM where, = HC concentration with the sample gas flowing through the NMC HC(wCutter) HC(w/oCutter) = HC concentration with the sample gas bypassing the NMC CEM = methane efficiency as determined per Annex III, Appendix 5, Section 1. 8. 4. 1. CEE = ethane efficiency as determined per Annex III, Appendix 5, Section 1. 8. 4. 2. 4. 3. 1. 1. Determination of the background corrected concentrations The average background concentration of the gaseous pollutants in the dilution air shall be subtracted from measured concentrations to get the net concentrations of the pollutants. The average values of the background concentrations can be determined by the sample bag method or by continuous measurement with integration. The following formula shall be used. where, conc = conce – concd * (1 – (1/DF)) conc = concentration of the respective pollutant in the diluted exhaust gas, corrected by the amount of the respective pollutant contained in the dilution air, ppm conce = concentration of the respective pollutant measured in the diluted exhaust gas, ppm concd DF = concentration of the respective pollutant measured in the dilution air, ppm = dilution factor The dilution factor shall be calculated as follows: (a) for diesel and LPG-fuelled gas engines DF = FS CO2, conce + (HCconce + COconce) * 10−4 (b) for NG-fuelled gas engines DF = FS CO2, conce + (NMHCconce + COconce) * 10−4 where, CO2, conce HCconce NMHCconce COconce FS = concentration of CO2 in the diluted exhaust gas, % vol = concentration of HC in the diluted exhaust gas, ppm C1 = concentration of NMHC in the diluted exhaust gas, ppm C1 = concentration of CO in the diluted exhaust gas, ppm = stoichiometric factor Concentrations measured on dry basis shall be converted to a wet basis in accordance with Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 4. 2. The stoichiometric factor shall be calculated as follows: FS = 100 * x x + y 2 + 3,76 * (x + y 4) C 173/72 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 where, x,y = fuel composition CxHy Alternatively, if the fuel composition is not known, the following stoichiometric factors may be used: FS (diesel) = 13,4 FS (LPG) FS (NG) = 11,6 = 9,5 4. 3. 2. Systems with flow compensation For systems without heat exchanger, the mass of the pollutants (g/test) shall be determined by calculating the instantaneous mass emissions and integrating the instantaneous values over the cycle. Also, the background correction shall be applied directly to the instantaneous concentration value. The following formulae shall be applied: (1) NOxmass = (2) NOxmass = (3) COmass = (4) HCmass = (5) HCmass = nΣ i = 1 nΣ i = 1 nΣ i = 1 nΣ i = 1 nΣ i = 1 (MTOTW,i * NOxconce,i * 0,001587 * KH,D) – (MTOTW * NOxconcd * (1–1/DF) * 0,001587 * KH,D) (diesel engines) (MTOTW,i * NOxconce,i * 0,001587 * KH,G) – (MTOTW * NOxconcd * (1–1/DF) * 0,001587 * KH,G) (gas engines) (MTOTW,i * COconce,i * 0,000966) – (MTOTW * COconcd * (1–1/DF) * 0,000966) (MTOTW,i * HCconce,i * 0,000479) – (MTOTW * HCconcd * (1–1/DF) * 0,000479) (diesel engines) (MTOTW,i * HCconce,i * 0,000502) – (MTOTW * HCconcd * (1–1/DF) * 0,000502) (LPG engines) (6) NMHCmass = nΣ i = 1 (MTOTW,i * NMHCconce,i * 0,000516) – (MTOTW * NOxconcd * (1–1/DF) * 0,000516) (NG engines) (7) CH4 mass = nΣ i = 1 (MTOTW,i * CH4 conce,i * 0,000552) – (MTOTW * CH4 concd * (1–1/DF) * 0,000552) (NG engines) where, conce = concentration of the respective pollutant measured in the diluted exhaust gas, ppm concd = concentration of the respective pollutant measured in the dilution air, ppm MTOTW,i = instantaneous mass of the diluted exhaust gas (see Section 4. 1), kg MTOTW = total mass of diluted exhaust gas over the cylce (see Section 4. 1), kg KH,D KH,G DF = humidity correction factor for diesel engines as determined in Section 4. 2 = humidity correction factor for gas engines as determined in Section 4. 2 = dilution factor ad determined in Section 4. 3. 1. 1. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/73 4. 4. Calculation of the specific emissions The emissions (g/kWh) shall be calculated for all individual components in the following way: NOx = NOxmass/Wact (diesel and gas engines) CO = COmass/Wact (diesel and gas engines) HC = HCmass/Wact (diesel and LPG fuelled gas engines) NMHC = NMHCmass/Wact (NG-fuelled gas engines) CH4 = CH4 mass/Wact (NG-fuelled gas engines) where, Wact = actual cycle work as determined in Section 3. 9. 2, kWh 5. CALCULATION OF THE PARTICULATE EMISSION (DIESEL ENGINES ONLY) 5. 1. Calculation of the mass flow The particulate mass (g/test) shall be calculated as follows: PTmass = Mf MSAM * MTOTW 1000 where, = particulate mass sampled over the cycle, mg Mf MTOTW = total mass of diluted exhaust gas over the cycle as determined in Section 4. 1, kg MSAM = mass of diluted exhaust gas taken from the dilution tunnel for collecting particulates, kg and, Mf Mf,p Mf,b = Mf,p + Mf,b if weighed separately, mg = particulate mass collected on the primary filter, mg = particulate mass collected on the back-up filter, mg If a double dilution system is used, the mass of the secondary dilution air shall be subtracted from the total mass of the double diluted exhaust gas sampled through the particulate filters. MSAM = MTOT – MSEC where, MTOT = mass of double diluted exhaust gas through particulate filter, kg MSEC = mass of secondary dilution air, kg If the particulate background level of the dilution air is determined in accordance with Section 3. 4, the particulate mass may be background corrected. In this case, the particulate mass (g/test) shall be calculated as follows: PTmass =[ Mf MSAM −( Md MDIL * (1 − 1 DF))] * MTOTW 1000 where, Mf, MSAM, MTOTW = see above MDIL = mass of primary dilution air sampled by background particulate sampler, kg Md DF = mass of the collected background particulates of the primary dilution air, mg = dilution factor as determined in Section 4. 3. 1. 1 C 173/74 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 5. 2. CALCULATION OF THE SPECIFIC EMISSION The particulate emission (g/kWh) shall be calculated in the following way: PT = PTmass/Wact where, Wact = actual cycle work as determined in Section 3. 9. 2, kWh 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/75 Appendix 3 ETC ENGINE DYNAMOMETER SCHEDULE Time s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 Normal speed % Normal torque % 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,1 23,1 12,6 21,8 19,7 54,6 71,3 55,9 72 86,7 51,7 53,4 34,2 45,5 54,6 64,5 71,7 79,4 89,7 57,4 59,7 90,1 82,9 51,3 28,5 29,3 26,7 20,4 14,1 6,5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25,5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1,5 21,5 28,5 71 76,8 80,9 4,9 18,1 85,4 61,8 0 48,9 87,6 92,7 99,5 96,8 85,4 54,8 99,4 0 30,6 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11,1 Time s 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 Normal speed % Normal torque % 28,5 32 4 34,5 64,1 58 50,3 66,4 81,4 88,7 52,5 46,4 48,6 55,2 62,3 68,4 74,5 38 41,8 47,1 52,5 56,9 58,3 56,2 52 43,3 36,1 27,6 21,1 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11,6 0 27,2 17 36 59,7 80,8 49,7 65,6 78,6 64,9 44,3 51,4 58,1 69,3 72 72,1 20,9 73,9 82,3 80,4 86 0 83,4 99,1 99,6 73,4 0 58,5 90,9 99,4 99 91,5 73,7 0 89,6 99,2 99,8 80,8 11,8 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14,8 0 74,8 76,9 78 86 17,9 0 86 72,2 ‘m’ ‘m’ 83,4 97 99,3 20,8 ‘m’ Time s 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 Normal speed % Normal torque % 65,3 64 59,7 52,8 45,9 38,7 32,4 27 21,7 19,1 34,7 16,4 0 1,2 30,1 30 54,4 77,2 58,1 45 68,7 85,7 60,2 59,4 72,7 79,9 44,3 41,5 56,2 65,7 74,4 54,4 47,9 54,5 62,7 62,3 46,2 44,3 48,2 51 50 49,2 49,3 49,9 51,6 49,7 48,5 50,3 51,1 54,6 56,6 58 53,6 40,8 32,9 26,3 20,9 10 0 0 0 0 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 0,4 14 48,6 11,2 2,1 19,3 73,9 74,4 55,6 0 82,1 98,1 67,2 0 98 99,6 45 0 84,4 98,2 99,1 84,7 0 89,7 99,5 96,8 0 54,2 83,2 13,3 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 72,5 84,5 64,8 76,5 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 0 0 0 0 0 C 173/76 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Time s 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 Normal speed % Normal torque % 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 21,2 30,8 5,9 34,6 59,9 84,3 68,7 43,6 41,5 49,9 60,8 70,2 81,1 49,2 56 56,2 61,7 69,2 74,1 72,4 71,3 71,2 67,1 65,5 64,4 62,9 62,2 62,9 58,8 56,9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 62,7 75,1 82,7 80,3 87 86,2 ‘m’ ‘m’ 85,4 94,3 99 99,4 92,4 0 86,2 99,3 99 99,3 99,8 8,4 0 9,1 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 25,6 35,6 24,4 ‘m’ ‘m’ Time s 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 Normal speed % Normal torque % 54,5 51,7 56,2 59,5 65,5 71,2 76,6 79 52,9 53,1 59 62,2 65 69 69,9 70,6 68,9 69,8 69,6 65,7 67,1 66,7 65,6 64,5 62,9 59,3 54,1 51,3 47,9 43,6 39,4 34,7 29,8 20,9 36,9 35,5 20,9 49,7 42,5 32 23,6 19,1 15,7 25,1 34,5 44,1 52,8 63,6 73,6 62,2 29,2 46,4 47,3 47,2 47,9 47,8 49,2 52,7 57,4 61,8 66,4 65,8 59 50,7 41,8 34,7 28,7 25,2 ‘m’ 17 78,7 94,7 99,1 99,5 99,9 0 97,5 99,7 99,1 99 99,1 83,1 28,4 12,5 8,4 9,1 7 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 73,4 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 11,9 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 0 73,5 76,8 81,4 87,4 98,6 99 99,7 ‘m’ ‘m’ 22 13,8 12,5 11,5 35,5 83,3 96,4 99,2 99 60,9 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ Time s 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 Normal speed % Normal torque % 43 38,7 48,1 40,3 42,4 46,4 46,9 46,1 45,7 45,5 46,4 51,3 51,3 53,2 53,9 53,4 53,8 50,6 47,8 41,6 38,7 35,9 34,6 34,8 35,9 38,8 41,5 47,1 53,1 46,4 42,5 43,6 47,1 54,1 62,9 72,6 82,4 88 46,4 53,4 58,4 61,5 64,8 68,1 73,4 73,3 73,5 68,3 45,4 47,2 44,5 47,8 46,8 46,9 46,8 46,1 46,1 45,5 44,7 43,8 41 41,1 38 35,9 33,5 53,1 48,3 49,9 24,8 0 31,9 61 52,1 47,7 30,7 23,1 23,2 31,9 73,6 60,7 51,1 46,8 50 52,1 45,7 22,1 26 17,8 29,8 71,6 47,3 80,3 87,2 90,8 94,7 99,2 99,7 0 0,7 58,6 87,5 99,5 99 99,6 99,5 99,4 0 95,2 99,2 99 99 99,2 99,7 29,8 14,6 0 49,9 75,7 9 10,3 15,9 12,7 8,9 6,2 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 6,4 6,3 0,3 0 48,9 ‘m’ ‘m’ 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/77 Time s 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 Normal speed % Normal torque % 48 45,3 41,6 44,3 44,3 43,4 44,3 43 42,2 42,7 45 43,6 42,2 44,8 43,4 45 42,2 61,2 56,3 59,7 62,3 67,9 69,5 73,1 77,7 79,7 82,5 85,3 86,6 89,4 62,2 52,7 50,2 49,3 52,2 51,3 51,3 51,1 51,1 51,8 51,3 51,1 51,3 52,3 52,9 53,8 51,7 53,5 52 51,7 53,2 54,2 55,2 53,8 53,1 55 57 61,5 59,4 59 57,3 64,1 70,9 58 41,5 44,1 46,8 47,2 ‘m’ ‘m’ 3,1 79 89,5 98,8 98,9 98,8 98,8 98,8 99 98,9 98,8 99 98,8 99 54,3 31,9 72,3 99,1 99 99,2 99,3 99,7 99,8 99,7 99,5 99,4 99,4 99,4 0 96,4 99,8 99,6 99,8 100 100 100 100 99,9 100 100 100 99,8 99,7 99,6 99,9 99,6 99,8 99,9 99,7 99,5 99,4 99,6 99,7 99,4 99,2 99 5,7 0 59,8 99 90,5 0 59,8 92,6 99,2 99,3 Time s 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 Normal speed % Normal torque % 51 53,2 53,1 55,9 53,9 52,5 51,7 51,5 52,8 54,9 57,3 60,7 62,4 60,1 53,2 44 35,2 30,5 26,5 22,5 20,4 19,1 19,1 13,4 6,7 3,2 14,3 34,1 23,9 31,7 32,1 35,9 36,6 38,7 38,4 39,4 39,7 40,5 40,8 39,7 39,2 38,7 32,7 30,1 21,9 12,8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30,5 19,7 16,3 27,2 21,7 29,7 36,6 61,3 40,8 36,6 39,4 51,3 58,5 100 99,7 99,7 53,1 13,9 ‘m’ ‘m’ 52,2 80 95 99,2 99,1 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 63,8 0 75,7 79,2 19,4 5,8 0,8 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25,6 56,9 45,1 4,6 1,3 28,6 73,7 59,5 0 27,8 80,4 88,9 11,1 Time s 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 Normal speed % Normal torque % 60,7 54,5 51,3 45,5 40,8 38,9 36,6 36,1 44,8 51,6 59,1 66 75,1 81 39,1 53,8 59,7 64,8 70,6 72,6 72 68,9 67,7 66,8 64,3 64,9 63,6 63 64,4 63 63,6 63,3 60,1 61 59,7 58,7 56 53,9 52,1 49,9 46,4 43,6 40,8 37,5 27,8 17,1 12,2 11,5 8,7 8 5,3 4 3,9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8,7 16,2 23,6 21,1 23,6 46,2 68,4 58,7 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 72,7 78,9 91,1 99,1 99,1 99,9 8 0 89,7 99,1 99 96,1 19,6 6,3 0,1 ‘m’ ‘m’ 16,9 7 12,5 7,7 38,2 11,8 0 5 9,1 8,4 0,9 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 0,6 0,9 1,1 0,5 0,9 0,2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22,8 49,4 56 56,1 56 68,8 61,2 ‘m’ C 173/78 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Time s 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 Normal speed % Normal torque % 31,6 19,9 32,9 43 57,4 72,1 53 48,1 56,2 65,4 72,9 67,5 39 41,9 44,1 46,8 48,7 50,5 52,5 51 50 49,1 47 43,1 39,2 40,6 41,8 44,4 48,1 53,8 58,6 63,6 68,5 72,2 77,1 57,8 60,3 61,9 63,8 64,7 65,4 65,7 65,6 49,1 50,4 50,5 51 49,4 49,2 48,6 47,5 46,5 46 45,6 47,1 46,2 47,9 49,5 50,6 51 53 54,9 55,7 56 56,1 55,6 55,4 54,9 ‘m’ 8,8 70,2 79 98,9 73,8 0 86 99 98,9 99,7 ‘m’ ‘m’ 38,1 80,4 99,4 99,9 99,7 90,3 1,8 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 0,5 53,4 65,1 67,8 99,2 98,9 98,8 99,2 89,4 0 79,1 98,8 98,8 98,8 98,9 46,5 44,5 3,5 0 73,1 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 11,3 42,8 83 99,3 99,7 99,9 99,7 99,6 99,3 99,1 99 99 9,3 ‘m’ ‘m’ 51,3 Time s 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 Normal speed % Normal torque % 54,9 54 53,8 52 50,4 50,6 49,3 50 50,4 51,9 53,6 54,6 56 55,8 58,4 59,9 60,9 63 64,3 64,8 65,9 66,2 65,2 65 63,6 62,4 61,8 59,8 59,2 59,7 61,2 62,2 62,8 63,5 64,7 64,7 65,4 66,1 64,3 64,3 63 62,2 61,6 62,4 62,2 61 58,7 55,5 51,7 49,2 48,8 47,9 46,2 45,6 45,6 45,5 43,8 41,9 41,3 41,4 41,2 41,8 41,8 43,2 45 44,2 43,9 38 59,8 39,3 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 0 41,7 73,2 99,7 99,5 99,3 99,1 99 99 98,9 98,8 98,8 98,8 98,9 64 46,5 28,7 1,8 6,8 53,6 82,5 98,8 98,8 98,8 98,8 98,8 49,4 37,2 46,3 72,3 72,3 77,4 69,3 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 40,4 ‘m’ ‘m’ 9,8 34,5 37,1 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 17,4 29 ‘m’ ‘m’ 10,7 Time s 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 Normal speed % Normal torque % 56,8 57,1 52 44,4 40,2 39,2 38,9 39,9 42,3 43,7 45,5 45,6 48,1 49 49,8 49,8 51,9 52,3 53,3 52,9 54,3 55,5 56,7 61,7 64,3 64,7 66,2 49,1 52,1 52,6 52,9 52,3 54,2 55,4 56,1 56,8 57,2 58,6 59,5 61,2 62,1 62,7 62,8 64 63,2 62,4 60,3 58,7 57,2 56,1 56 55,2 54,8 55,7 56,6 58 58,6 58,7 59,3 58,6 60,5 59,2 59,9 59,6 59,9 59,9 60,5 60,3 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 16,5 73,2 89,8 98,6 98,8 99,1 99,2 99,7 100 99,9 99,9 99,5 99,4 99,3 99,3 99,2 99,1 99 98,8 47,4 1,8 ‘m’ ‘m’ 46 61 0 20,4 56,7 59,8 49,2 33,7 96 98,9 98,8 98,8 98,8 98,8 98,8 98,9 46,3 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 9,3 26,3 42,8 47,1 52,4 50,3 20,6 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 9,7 9,6 9,6 9,6 6,2 9,6 13,1 20,7 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/79 Time s 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 Normal speed % Normal torque % 59,9 60,5 61,5 60,9 61,2 62,8 63,4 64,6 64,1 63 62,7 63,5 64,1 64,3 64,1 63,7 62,9 62,4 61,7 59,8 57,4 54,8 54,3 52,9 52,4 50,4 48,6 47,9 46,8 46,9 49,5 50,5 52,3 54,1 56,3 58,7 57,3 59 59,8 60,3 61,2 61,8 62,5 62,4 61,5 63,7 61,9 61,6 60,3 59,2 57,3 52,3 49,3 47,3 46,3 46,8 46,6 44,3 43,1 42,4 41,8 43,8 44,6 46 46,9 47,9 50,2 51,2 31 42 52,5 51,4 57,7 98,8 96,1 45,4 5 3,2 14,9 35,8 73,3 37,4 21 21 18 32,7 46,2 45,1 43,9 42,8 65,2 62,1 30,6 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 9,4 41,7 37,8 20,4 30,7 41,8 26,5 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 29,7 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 38,8 35,1 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 2,1 2,4 68,8 89,2 99,2 99,4 99,7 99,8 99,6 Time s 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 Normal speed % Normal torque % 52,3 53 54,2 55,5 56,7 57,3 58 60,5 60,2 60,3 60,5 61,4 60,3 60,5 61,2 61,6 61,5 61,2 61,3 63,1 63,2 62,3 62 61,6 61,6 61,8 62 62 61,1 61,2 60,7 60,7 60,9 60,1 59,3 59,9 59,4 59,2 59,5 58,3 58,2 57,6 57,1 57 57 56,5 56,3 56,1 55,2 54,7 55,2 55,2 55,9 55,9 56,1 55,8 55,9 55,8 56,4 56,4 56,4 56,4 54 53,4 52,3 52,1 52,3 52,2 99,4 99,3 99,2 99,1 99 98,9 98,9 31,1 ‘m’ ‘m’ 6,3 19,3 1,2 2,9 34,1 13,2 16,4 16,4 ‘m’ ‘m’ 4,8 22,3 38,5 29,6 26,6 28,1 29,6 16,3 ‘m’ ‘m’ 19,2 32,5 17,8 19,2 38,2 45 32,4 23,5 40,8 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 0,6 26,3 29,2 20,5 ‘m’ ‘m’ 17,5 29,2 29,2 16 26,3 36,5 19 9,2 21,9 42,8 38 11 35,1 7,3 5,4 27,6 32 33,4 34,9 Time s 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 Normal speed % Normal torque % 52,8 53,7 54 55,1 55,2 54,7 52,5 51,8 51,4 50,9 51,2 50,3 50,2 50,9 49,9 50,9 49,8 50,4 50,4 49,7 51 50,3 50,2 49,9 50,9 50 50,2 50,2 49,9 50,4 50,2 50,3 49,9 51,1 50,6 49,9 49,6 49,4 49 49,8 50,9 50,4 49,8 49,1 50,4 49,8 49,3 49,1 49,9 49,1 50,4 50,9 51,4 51,5 52,2 52,8 53,3 53,6 53,4 53,9 55,2 55,8 55,7 55,8 56,4 55,4 55,2 55,8 60,1 69,7 70,7 71,7 46 12,6 0 24,7 43,9 71,1 76,8 87,5 99,8 100 99,7 100 99,7 99,8 99,8 99,7 100 99,8 99,8 99,7 100 99,7 99,8 99,8 99,7 99,8 99,8 99,8 99,7 100 99,9 99,7 99,6 99,6 99,5 99,7 100 99,8 99,7 99,5 99,8 99,7 99,5 99,5 99,7 99,5 99,8 100 99,9 99,9 99,7 74,1 46 36,4 33,5 58,9 73,8 52,4 9,2 2,2 33,6 ‘m’ ‘m’ 26,3 C 173/80 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Time s 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 Normal speed % Normal torque % 55,8 56,4 57,6 58,8 59,9 62,3 63,1 63,7 63,3 48 47,9 49,9 49,9 49,6 49,9 49,3 49,7 49,1 49,4 48,3 49,4 48,5 48,7 48,7 49,1 49 49,8 48,7 48,5 49,3 49,7 48,3 49,8 49,4 49,8 50,5 50,3 51,2 50,5 50,6 50,4 49,9 49,1 47,9 48,1 47,5 46,9 47,7 46,9 46,5 48 47,2 48,7 48,7 47,8 48,8 47,4 47,3 47,3 46,9 46,7 46,8 46,9 46,7 45,5 45,5 44,2 43 23,3 50,2 68,3 90,2 98,9 98,8 74,4 49,4 9,8 0 73,5 99,7 48,8 2,3 ‘m’ ‘m’ 47,5 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 31,3 45,3 44,5 61 64,3 64,4 65,6 64,5 82,9 86 89 81,4 49,9 20,1 24 36,2 34,5 30,3 53,5 61,6 73,6 84,6 87,7 80 50,4 38,6 63,1 5 47,4 49,8 23,9 44,6 65,2 60,4 61,5 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ Time s 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 Normal speed % Normal torque % 42,5 41 39,9 39,9 40,1 39,9 39,4 43,8 52,9 52,8 53,4 54,7 56,3 57,5 59 59,8 60,1 61,8 61,8 61,7 62 62,3 62 61,3 61,1 61,2 61,1 61,1 61,3 61,3 60,4 58,8 57,7 56 54,7 53,3 52,6 53,4 53,9 54,9 55,8 57,1 56,5 58,9 58,7 59,8 61 60,7 59,4 57,9 57,6 56,3 55 53,7 52,1 51,1 49,7 49,1 48,7 48,2 48 48 47,2 47,3 46,6 47,4 46,3 45,4 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 38,2 48,1 48 59,3 19,8 0 88,9 99,5 99,3 99,1 99 98,9 98,9 98,9 48,3 55,6 59,8 55,6 29,6 19,3 7,9 19,2 43 59,7 98,8 98,8 26,6 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 23,2 84,2 99,4 99,3 99,2 99 99,1 98,9 98,9 98,9 98,8 19,2 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 25,8 46,1 46,9 46,7 70 70 67,6 67,6 74,7 13 ‘m’ ‘m’ Time s 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 Normal speed % Normal torque % 45,5 44,8 46,6 46,3 48,5 49,9 49,1 49,1 51 51,5 50,9 51,6 52,1 50,9 52,2 51,5 51,5 50,8 50,3 50,3 49,3 48,8 47,8 48,1 48,4 49,6 51 51,6 53,3 55,2 55,7 56,4 56,8 57 57,6 56,9 56,4 57 56,4 57 57,7 58,6 58,9 59,4 58,8 60,1 60,6 60,7 60,7 60 60,2 59,7 59,8 59,8 59,8 60 59,5 59,9 59,8 59 58,9 59,1 58,9 58,4 58,7 58,3 57,5 57,2 24,8 73,8 99 98,9 99,4 99,7 99,5 99,5 100 99,9 100 99,9 99,7 100 99,7 98,3 47,2 78,4 83 31,7 31,3 21,5 59,4 77,1 87,6 87,5 81,4 66,7 63,2 62 43,9 30,7 23,4 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 4 23,4 41,7 49,2 56,6 56,6 64 68,2 71,4 71,3 79,1 83,3 77,1 73,5 55,5 54,4 73,3 77,9 73,9 76,5 82,3 82,8 65,8 48,6 62,2 70,4 62,1 67,4 58,9 57,7 57,8 57,6 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/81 Time s 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 Normal speed % Normal torque % 57,1 57 56,4 56,7 55,9 56,3 56,7 56 56 56,4 56,7 56,9 57 57,7 57,5 58,4 58,7 58,2 58,5 58,8 59 58,2 57,6 57,1 57,2 57 56,7 56,8 56,9 57 57,4 57,3 57,7 57,5 58,6 58,2 58,8 58,3 58,7 59,1 58,6 58,8 58,8 58,7 59,1 59,1 59,4 60,6 59,6 60,1 60,6 59,6 60,7 60,5 59,7 59,6 59,8 59,6 60,1 59,9 59,7 59,6 59,7 59,8 59,9 60,6 60,5 60,2 42,6 70,1 59,6 39 68,1 79,1 89,7 89,4 93,1 93,1 94,4 94,8 94,1 94,3 93,7 93,2 93,2 93,7 93,1 86,2 72,9 59,9 8,5 47,6 74,4 79,1 67,2 69,1 71,3 77,3 78,2 70,6 64 55,6 49,6 41,1 40,6 21,1 24,9 24,8 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 2,6 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 4,1 7,1 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 4,9 5,9 6,1 ‘m’ ‘m’ 22 10,3 10 6,2 7,3 14,8 Time s 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 Normal speed % Normal torque % 60,6 60,6 61 61 61,3 61,2 61,5 61 61,1 60,5 60,2 60,2 60,2 59,9 59,4 59,6 59,3 58,9 58,8 58,9 58,9 58,9 58,7 58,7 59,3 60,1 60,5 59,5 59,7 59,7 60,1 60,8 60,9 61,3 61,8 62 62,2 62,6 62,7 62,9 63,1 63,5 63,6 64,3 63,7 63,8 63,6 63,4 63,2 63,3 62,9 63 63,1 61,8 61,6 61 61,2 60,8 61,1 60,7 60,6 60,5 60,6 60,9 60,9 61,4 61,3 61,5 8,2 5,5 14,3 12 34,2 17,1 15,7 9,5 9,2 4,3 7,8 5,9 5,3 4,6 21,5 15,8 10,1 9,4 9 35,4 30,7 25,9 22,9 24,4 61 56 50,6 16,2 50 31,4 43,1 38,4 40,2 49,7 45,9 45,9 45,8 46,8 44,3 44,4 43,7 46,1 40,7 49,5 27 15 18,7 8,4 8,7 21,6 19,7 22,1 20,3 19,1 17,1 0 22 40,3 34,3 16,1 16,6 18,5 29,8 19,5 22,3 35,8 42,9 31 Time s 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 Normal speed % Normal torque % 61,3 61 60,8 60,9 61,2 60,9 60,7 60,9 60,7 59,6 59,6 59,4 59,3 58,9 59,1 59 59 59 58,8 58,9 58,9 59,3 58,9 59,3 59,4 59,6 59,4 59,3 59,4 59,4 58,8 59,1 58,5 58,8 58,5 58,7 59,1 59,1 59,1 59,4 59,7 60,7 59,8 60,2 59,9 61 60,6 60,6 59,6 59,6 60,6 59,8 60 60,5 60,9 61,3 61,2 61,4 61,3 61,4 61,1 61,5 61 61,1 61,4 61,6 61,7 61,8 19,2 9,3 44,2 55,3 56 60,1 59,1 56,8 58,1 78,4 84,6 66,6 75,5 49,6 75,8 77,6 67,8 56,7 54,2 59,6 60,8 56,1 48,5 42,9 41,4 38,9 32,9 30,6 30 25,3 18,6 18 10,6 10,5 8,2 13,7 7,8 6 6 13,1 22,3 10,5 9,8 8,8 8,7 9,1 28,2 22 23,2 19 38,4 41,6 47,3 55,4 58,7 37,9 38,3 58,7 51,3 71,1 51 56,6 60,6 75,4 69,4 69,9 59,6 54,8 C 173/82 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Time s 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 Normal speed % Normal torque % 61,6 61,3 61,3 61,2 61,3 61,2 61,2 61 60,9 61 60,7 60,7 60,8 61 61 61,3 61,7 62,3 62,3 62,3 62,8 62,8 62,9 62,9 62,8 62,7 61,5 61,9 61,5 61 60,9 60,6 60,3 60,8 60,2 60,5 60,2 60,7 60,9 59,6 60,2 59,5 59,8 59,6 59,3 59 58,8 58,7 59,2 59,7 60,4 60,2 60,4 59,9 59,9 59,6 59,4 59,4 60,4 59,5 59,3 60,9 60,7 60,9 61 60,6 60,9 60,8 53,6 53,5 52,9 54,1 53,2 52,2 52,3 48 41,5 32,2 22 23,3 38,8 40,7 30,6 62,6 55,9 43,4 37,4 35,7 34,4 31,5 31,7 29,9 29,4 28,7 14,7 17,2 6,1 9,9 4,8 11,1 6,9 7 9,2 21,7 22,4 31,6 28,9 21,7 18 16,7 15,7 15,7 15,7 7,5 7,1 16,5 50,7 60,2 44 35,3 17,1 13,5 12,8 14,8 15,9 22 38,4 38,8 31,9 40,8 39 30,1 29,3 28,4 36,3 30,5 Time s 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 Normal speed % Normal torque % 60,7 60,1 59,9 60,4 60,7 59,9 59,7 59,5 59,2 58,8 58,7 58,7 57,9 58,2 57,6 58,3 57,2 57,4 58,3 58,3 58,8 58,8 59,4 59,1 59,1 59 59,5 59,4 59,4 59,4 59,4 58,9 59 58,8 58,9 58,8 58,9 59,1 58,8 59 58,7 57,9 58 57,1 56,7 56,7 56,6 56,8 56,3 56,3 56 56,7 56,6 56,9 56,9 57,4 57,4 58,3 58,5 59,1 59,4 59,6 59,5 59,6 59,3 59,4 59,1 59 26,7 4,7 0 36,2 32,5 3,1 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 0,6 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 9,5 6 27,3 59,9 7,3 21,7 38,9 26,2 25,5 26 39,1 52,3 31 27 29,8 23,1 16 31,5 25,9 40,2 28,4 38,9 35,3 30,3 19 3 0 2,4 ‘m’ ‘m’ 5,3 2,1 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 3,8 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 13,9 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 0,5 9,2 11,2 26,8 11,7 Time s 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 Normal speed % Normal torque % 58,8 58,7 57,5 57,4 57,1 57,1 57 57,1 57,3 57,3 58,2 58,7 58,3 58,6 59 59,8 59,3 59,7 60,1 60,7 60,7 60,7 60,7 61,1 61,1 60,8 60,1 60,7 60,4 60 59,9 60,8 60,4 60,2 59,6 59,9 59,8 59,6 59,4 60,1 59,5 59,8 60,6 59,3 59,3 59,4 58,7 58,8 59,1 59,7 59,5 59,6 59,6 59,4 59,6 59,9 60,5 59,6 59,7 60,9 60,1 59,9 60,8 60,6 60,9 61,1 61,2 61,4 6,4 5 ‘m’ ‘m’ 1,1 0 4,5 3,7 3,3 16,8 29,3 12,5 12,2 12,7 13,6 21,9 20,9 19,2 15,9 16,7 18,1 40,6 59,7 66,8 58,8 64,7 63,6 83,2 82,2 80,5 78,7 67,9 57,7 60,6 72,7 73,6 74,1 84,6 76,1 76,9 84,6 77,5 67,9 47,3 43,1 38,3 38,2 39,2 67,9 60,5 32,9 20 34,4 23,9 15,7 41 26,3 14 21,2 19,6 34,3 27 25,6 26,3 26,1 38 31,6 30,6 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/83 Time s 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 Normal speed % Normal torque % 61,7 61,5 61,7 62,2 61,4 61,8 61,8 61,6 61,7 61,7 61,7 61,2 61,9 61,4 61,7 62,4 62,8 62,2 62,5 62,3 62,6 62,3 62,7 62,2 61,9 62,5 61,7 61,7 61,6 61,4 60,8 60,7 61 60,4 61 60,7 60,5 60,8 61,2 60,9 61,1 60,7 61,3 60,9 61,4 61,7 61,8 61,7 61,7 61,5 61,3 61,5 61,1 61,4 61,4 61,3 61 61,5 61 60,9 60,9 60,6 29,6 28,8 27,8 20,3 19,6 19,7 18,7 17,7 8,7 1,4 5,9 8,1 45,8 31,5 22,3 21,7 21,9 22,2 31 31,3 31,7 22,8 12,6 15,2 32,6 23,1 19,4 10,8 10,2 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 12,4 5,3 13,1 29,6 28,9 27,1 27,3 20,6 13,9 13,4 26,1 23,7 32,1 33,5 34,1 17 2,5 5,9 14,9 17,2 ‘m’ ‘m’ 8,8 8,8 18 13 3,7 3,1 4,7 4,1 ‘m’ = motoring Time s 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 Normal speed % Normal torque % 60,6 60,6 60,7 60,6 60,1 60,5 60,4 59,9 59,6 59,6 59,9 59,9 59,8 59,4 59,5 59,6 59,4 60,9 60,5 60,1 60,1 60,5 60 60 60 60,1 59,9 59,4 59,5 59,5 59,5 59,4 59,6 59,5 60,1 59,4 59,8 59,9 60,1 59,6 59,6 59,4 59,6 60,1 60,2 59,4 60,3 59,9 60,2 60,3 60,4 60,6 60,8 60,9 60,9 60,7 60,9 61,1 61,1 61 61 60,6 6,7 12,8 11,9 12,4 12,4 12 11,8 12,4 12,4 9,1 0 20,4 4,4 3,1 26,3 20,1 35 22,1 12,2 11 8,2 6,7 5,1 5,1 9 5,7 8,5 6 5,5 14,2 6,2 10,3 13,8 13,9 18,9 13,1 5,4 2,9 7,1 12 4,9 22,7 22 17,4 16,6 28,6 22,4 20 18,6 11,9 11,6 10,6 16 17 16,1 11,4 11,3 11,2 25,6 14,6 10,4 ‘m’ Time s 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 Normal speed % Normal torque % 60,9 60,8 59,9 59,8 59,1 58,8 58,8 58,2 58,5 57,5 57,9 57,8 58,3 57,8 57,5 58,4 58,1 58,8 58,3 58,3 59 58,2 57,9 58,5 57,4 58,2 58,2 57,3 58 57,5 57,4 58,8 57,7 58,4 58,4 59 59 58,8 58,8 59,1 59,4 59,6 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ‘m’ 4,8 ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ ‘m’ 14,3 4,4 0 20,9 9,2 8,2 15,3 38 15,4 11,8 8,1 5,5 4,1 4,9 10,1 7,5 7 6,7 6,6 17,3 11,4 47,4 28,8 24,3 25,5 35,5 29,3 33,8 18,7 9,8 23,9 48,2 37,2 29,1 25 20 15 10 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 173/84 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 A graphical display of the ETC dynamometer schedule is shown in Figure 5. Figure 5 ETC dynamometer schedule Urban streets ETC Rural roads Motorways Time [sec] 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/85 Appendix 4 MEASUREMENT AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES 1. INTRODUCTION Gaseous components, particulates, and smoke emitted by the engine submitted for testing shall be measured by the methods described in Annex V. The respective sections of Annex V describe the recommended analytical systems for the gaseous emissions (Section 1), the recommended particulate diluton and sampling systems (Section 2), and the recommended opacimeters for smoke measurement (Section 3). For the ESC, the gaseous components shall be determined in the raw exhaust gas. Optionally, they may be determined in the diluted exhaust gas, if a full flow dilution system is used for particulate determination. Particulates shall be determined with either a partial flow or a full flow dilution system. For the ETC, only a full flow dilution system shall be used for determining gaseous and particulate emissions, and is considered the reference system. However, partial flow dilution systems may be approved by the Technical Service, if their equivalency according to Section 6. 2 to Annex I is proven, and if a detailed description of the data evaluation and calculation procedures is submitted to the Technical Service. 2. DYNAMOMETER AND TEST CELL EQUIPMENT The following equipment shall be used for emission tests of engines on engine dynamometers. 2. 1. Engine dynamometer An engine dynamometer shall be used with adequate characteristics to perform the test cycles described in Appendices 1 and 2 to this annex. The speed measuring system shall have an accuracy of 6 2 % of reading. The torque measuring system shall have an accuracy of 6 3 % of reading in the range. 20 % of full scale, and an accuracy of 6 0,6 % of full scale in the range # 20 % of full scale. 2. 2. Other instruments Measuring instruments for fuel consumption, air consumption, temperature of coolant and lubricant, exhaust gas pressure and intake manifold depression, exhaust gas temperature, air intake temperature, atmospheric pressure, humidity and fuel temperature shall be used, as required. These instruments shall satisfy the requirements given in Table 8: Table 8 Accuracy of measuring instruments Measuring instrument Accuracy Fuel consumption Air consumption Temperatures # 600 K (327 °C) Temperatures. 600 K (327 °C) Atmospheric pressure Exhaust gas pressure Intake depression Other pressures Relative humidity Absolute humidity ± 2 % of engine’s maximum value ± 2 % of engine’s maximum value ± 2 K absolute ± 1 % of reading ± 0,1 kPa absolute ± 0,2 kPa absolute ± 0,05 kPa absolute ± 0,1 kPa absolute ± 3 % absolute ± 5 % of reading C 173/86 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 2. 3. Exhaust gas flow For calculation of the emissions in the raw exhaust, it is necessary to know the exhaust gas flow (see Section 4. 4 of Appendix 1). For the determination of the exhaust flow either of the following methods may be used: (a) Direct measurement of the exhaust flow by flow nozzle or equivalent metering system; (b) Measurement of the air flow and the fuel flow by suitable metering systems and calculation of the exhaust flow by the following equation: GEXHW = GAIRW + GFUEL (for wet exhaust mass) The accuracy of exhaust flow determination shall be 6 2,5 % of reading or better. 2. 4. Diluted exhaust gas flow For calculation of the emissions in the diluted exhaust using a full flow dilution system (mandatory for the ETC), it is necessary to know the diluted exhaust gas flow (see Section 4. 3 of Appendix 2). The total mass flow rate of the diluted exhaust (GTOTW) or the total mass of the diluted exhaust gas over the cycle (MTOTW) shall be measured with a PDP or CFV (Annex V, Section 2. 3. 1). The accuracy shall be 6 2 % of reading or better, and shall be determined according to the provisions of Annex III, Appendix 5, Section 2. 4. 3. DETERMINATION OF THE GASEOUS COMPONENTS 3. 1. General analyser specifications The analysers shall have a measuring range appropriate for the accuracy required to measure the concentrations of the exhaust gas components (Section 3. 1. 1). It is recommended that the analysers be operated such that the measured concentration falls between 15 and 100 % of full scale. If read-out systems (computers, data loggers) can provide sufficient accuracy and resolution below 15 % of full scale, measurements below 15 % of full scale are also acceptable. In this case, additional calibrations of at least four non-zero nominally equally spaced points are to be made to ensure the accuracy of the calibration curves according to Annex III, Appendix 5, Section 1. 5. 5. 2. The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of the equipment shall be on a level as to minimise additional errors. 3. 1. 1. Measurement error The total measurement error, including the cross sensitivity to other gases (see Annex III, Appendix 5, Section 1. 9), shall not exceed 6 5 % of the reading or 6 3,5 % of full scale, whichever is smaller. For concentrations of less than 100 ppm the measurement error shall not exceed 6 4 ppm. 3. 1. 2. Repeatability The repeatability, defined as 2,5 times, the standard deviation of 10 repetitive responses to a given calibration or span gas, has to be not greater than 6 1 % of full scale concentration for each range used above 155 ppm (or ppmC) or 6 2 % of each range used below 155 ppm (or ppmC). 3. 1. 3. Noise The analyser peak-to-peak response to zero and calibration or span gases over any 10 seconds period shall not exceed 2 % of full scale on all ranges used. 3. 1. 4. Zero drift The zero drift during a one hour period shall be less than 2 % or full scale on the lowest range used. The zero response is defined as the mean response, including noise, to a zero gas during a 30 seconds time interval. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/87 3. 1. 5. Span drift The span drift during a one-hour period shall be less than 2 % or full scale on the lowest range used. Span is defined as the difference between the span response and the zero response. The span response is defined as the mean response, including noise, to a span gas during a 30 seconds’ time interval. 3. 2. Gas drying The optional gas drying device must have a minimal effect on the concentration of the measured gases. Chemical dryers are not an acceptable method of removing water from the sample. 3. 3. Analysers Sections 3. 3. 1. to 3. 3. 4 describe the measurement principles to be used. A detailed description of the measurement systems is given in Annex V. The gases to be measured shall be analysed with the following instruments. For non-linear analysers, the use of linearising circuits is permitted. 3. 3. 1. Carbon monoxide (CO) analysis The carbon monoxide analyser shall be of the non-dispersive infra-red (NDIR) absorption type. 3. 3. 2. Carbon dioxide (CO2) analysis The carbon dioxide analyser shall be of the non-dispersive infra-red (NDIR) absorption type. 3. 3. 3. Hydrocarbon (HC) analysis For diesel and LPG-fuelled gas engines, the hydrocarbon analyser shall be of the heated flame ionisation detector (HFID) type with detector, valves, pipework. etc. heated so as to maintain a gas temperature of 463K 6 10K (190 6 10°C). For NG-fuelled gas engines, the hydrocarbon analyser may be of the non heated flame ionisation detector (FID) type depending upon the method used (see Annex V. Section 1. 3). 3. 3. 4. Non-methane hydrocarbon (NMHC) analysis (NG-fuelled gas engines only) Non-methane hydrocarbons shall be determined by either of the following methods: 3. 3. 4. 1. Gas chromatographic (GC) method Non-methane hydrocarbons shall be determined by subtraction of the methane analysed with a gas chromatograph (GC) conditioned at 423 K (150 °C) from the hydrocarbons measured according to Section 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. 4. 2. Non-methane cutter (NMC) method The determination of the non-methane fraction shall be performed with a heated NMC operated in line with an FID as per Section 3. 3. 3 by subtraction of the methane from the hydrocarbons. 3. 3. 5. Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) analysis The oxides of nitrogen analyser shall be of the chemiluminescent detector (CLD) or heated chemiluminescent detector (HCLD) type with a NO2/NO converter, if measured on a dry basis. If measured on a wet basis, a HCLD with converter maintained above 328 K (55°C) shall be used, provided the water quench check (see Annex III, Appendix 5, Section 1. 9. 2. 2) is satisfied. 3. 4. Sampling of gaseous emissions 3. 4. 1. Raw exhaust gas (ESC only) The gaseous emissions sampling probes must be fitted at least 0,5 m or 3 times the diameter of the exhaust pipe — whichever is the larger — upstream of the exit of the exhaust gas system as far as applicable and sufficiently close to the engine as to ensure an exhaust gas temperature of at least 343 K (70°C) at the probe. C 173/88 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 In the case of a multi-cylinder engine with a branched exhaust manifold, the inlet of the probe shall be located sufficiently far downstream, so as to ensure that the sample is representative of the average exhaust emissions from all cylinders. In multi-cylinder engines having distinct groups of manifolds, such as in a ‘Vee’ engine configuration, it is permissible to acquire a sample from each group individually and calculate an average exhaust emission. Other methods which have been shown to correlate with the above methods may be used. For exhaust emission calculation the total exhaust mass flow must be used. If the engine is equipped with an exhaust after-treatment system, the exhaust sample shall be taken downstream of the exhaust after-treatment system. 3. 4. 2. Diluted exhaust gas (mandatory for ETC, optional for ESC) The exhaust pipe between the engine and the full flow dilution system shall conform to the requirements of Annex V, Section 2. 3. 1, EP. The gaseous emissions sample probe(s) shall be installed in the dilution tunnel at a point where the dilution air and exhaust gas are well mixed, and in close proximity to the particulates’ sampling probe. For the ETC, sampling can generally be done in two ways: — the pollutants are sampled into a sampling bag over the cycle and measured after completion of the test; — the pollutants are sampled continuously and integrated over the cycle; this method is mandatory for HC and NOx. 4. DETERMINATION OF THE PARTICULATES The determination of the particulates requires a dilution system. Dilution may be accomplished by a partial flow dilution system (ESC only) or a full flow dilution system (mandatory for ETC). The flow capacity of the dilution system shall be large enough to completely eliminate water condensation in the dilution and sampling systems, and maintain the temperature of the diluted exhaust gas at or below 325 K (52°C) immediately upstream of the filter holders. Dehumidifying the dilution air before entering the dilution system is permitted, and especially useful if dilution air humidity is high. The temperature of the dilution air shall be 298 K 6 5 K (25°C 6 5°C). If the ambient temperature is below 293 K (20°C), dilution air pre-heating above the upper temperature limit of 303 K (30°C) is recommended. However, the dilution air temperature must not exceed 325 K (52°C) prior to the introduction of the exhaust in the dilution tunnel. The partial flow dilution system has to be designed to split the exhaust stream into two fractions, the smaller one being diluted with air and subsequently used for particulate measurement. For this it is essential that the dilution ratio be determined very accurately. Different splitting methods can be applied, whereby the type of splitting used dictates to a significant degree the sampling hardware and procedures to be used (Annex V, Section 2. 2). The particulate sampling probe shall be installed in close proximity to the gaseous emissions sampling probe, and the installation shall comply with the provisions of Section 3. 4. 1. To determine the mass of the particulates, a particulate sampling system, particulate sampling filters, a microgram balance, and a temperature and humidity controlled weighing chamber, are required. For particulate sampling, the single filter method shall be applied which uses one pair of filters (see Section 4. 1. 3) for the whole test cycle. For the ESC, considerable attention must be paid to sampling times and flows during the sampling phase of the test. 4. 1. Particulate sampling filters 4. 1. 1. Filter specification Fluorocarbon coated glas-fibre filters or fluorocarbon based membrane filters are required. All filter types shall have a 0,3 µm DOP (di-octylphthalate) collection efficiency of at least 95 % at a gas face velocity between 35 and 80 cm/s. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/89 4. 1. 2. Filter size Particulate filters must have a minimum diameter of 47 mm (37 mm stain diameter). Larger diameter filters are acceptable (Section 4. 1. 5). 4. 1. 3. Primary and back-up filters The diluted exhaust shall be sampled by a pair of filters placed in series (one primary and one back-up filter) during the test sequence. The back-up filter shall be located no more than 100 mm downstream of, and shall not be in contact with the primary filter. The filters may be weighed separately or as a pair with the filters placed stain side to stain side. 4. 1. 4. Filter face velocity A gas face velocity through the filter of 35 to 80 cm/s shall be achieved. The pressure drop increase between the beginning and the end of the test shall be no more than 25 kPa. 4. 1. 5. Filter loading The recommended minimum filter loading shall be 0,5 mg/1075 mm2 stain area. For the most common filter sizes the values are shown in Table 9. Table 9 Recommended filter loading Filter diameter (mm) 47 70 90 110 Recommended stain diameter (mm) Recommended minimum loading (mg) 37 60 80 100 0,5 1,3 2,3 3,6 4. 2. Weighing chamber and analytical balance specifications 4. 2. 1. Weighing chamber conditions The temperature of the chamber (or room) in which the particulate filters are conditioned and weighed shall be maintained to within 295 K 6 3 K (22°C 6 3°C) during all filter conditioning and weighing. The humidity shall be maintained to a dewpoint of 282,5 K 6 3 K (9,5°C 6 3°C) and a relative humidity of 45 % 6 8 %. 4. 2. 2. Reference filter weighing The chamber (or room) environment shall be free of any ambient contaminants (such as dust) that would settle on the particulate filters during their stabilisation. Disturbances to weighing room specifications as outlined in Section 4. 2. 1 will be allowed if the duration of the disturbances does not exceed 30 minutes. The weighing room should meet the required specifications prior to personal entrance into the weighing room. At least two unused reference filters or reference filter pairs shall be weighed within 4 hours of, but preferable at the same time as the sample filter (pair) weighings. They shall be the same size and material as the sample filters. If the average weight of the reference filters (reference filter pairs) changes between sample filter weighings by more than 6 5 % (6 7,5 % for the filter pair respectively) of the recommended minimum filter loading (Section 4. 1. 5), then all sample filters shall be discarded and the emissions test repeated. If the weighing room stability criteria outlined in Section 4. 2. 1. is not met, but the reference filter (pair) weighings meet the above criteria, the engine manufacturer has the option of accepting the sample filter weights or voiding the tests, fixing the weighing room control system and rerunning the test. C 173/90 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 4. 2. 3. Analytical balance The analytical balance used to determine the weights of all filters shall have a precision (standard deviation) of 20 µg and a resolution of 10 µg (1 digit = 10 µg). For filters less than 70 mm diameter, the precision and resolution shall be 2 µg and 1 µg, respectively. 4. 2. 4. Elimination of static electricity effects To eliminate the effects of static electricity, the filters should be neutralised prior to weighing, for example, by a Polonium neutraliser or a device of similar effect. 4. 3. Additional specifications for particulate measurement All parts of the dilution system and the sampling system from the exhaust pipe up to the filter holder, which are in contact with raw and diluted exhaust gas, must be designed to minimise deposition or alteration of the particulates. All parts must be made of electrically conductive materials that do not react with exhaust gas components, and must be electrically grounded to prevent electrostatic effects. 5. DETERMINATION OF SMOKE This section provides specifications for the required and optional test equipment to be used for the ELR test. The smoke shall be measured with an opacimeter having an opacity and a light absorption coefficient readout mode. The opacity readout mode shall only be used for calibration and checking of the opacimeter. The smoke values of the rest cycle shall be measured in the light absorption coefficient readout mode. 5. 1. General requirements The ELR requires the use of a smoke measurement and data-processing system which includes three functional units. These units may be integrated into a single component or provided as a system of interconnected components. The three functional units are: — An opacimeter meeting the specifications of Annex V, Section 3. — A data-processing unit capable of performing the functions described in Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 6. — A printer and/or electronic storage medium to record and output the required smoke values specified in Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 6. 3. 5. 2. Specific requirements 5. 2. 1. Linearity The linearity shall be within 6 2 % opacity. 5. 2. 2. Zero drift The zero drift during a one-hour period shall not exceed 6 1 % opacity. 5. 2. 3. Opacimeter display and range For display in opacity, the range shall be 0 — 100 % opacity, and the readability 0,1 % opacity. For display in light absorption coefficient, the range shall be 0 — 30 m-1 light absorption coefficient, and the readability 0,01m-1 light absorption coefficient. 5. 2. 4. Instrument response time The physical response time of the opacimeter shall not exceed 0,2 s. The physical response time is the difference between the times when the output of a rapid response receiver reaches 10 and 90 % of the full deviation when the opacity of the gas being measured is changed in less than 0,1 s. The electrical response time of the opacimeter shall not exceed 0,05 s. The electrical response time is the difference between the times when the opacimeter output reaches 10 and 90 % of the full scale when the light source is interrupted or completely extinguished in less than 0,01 s. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/91 5. 2. 5. Neutral density filters Any neutral density filter used in conjunction with opacimeter calibration, linearity measurements, or setting span shall have its value known to within 1,0 % opacity. The filter’s nominal value must be checked for accuracy at least yearly using a reference traceable to a national or international standard. Neutral density filters are precision devices and can easily be damaged during use. Handling should be minimised and, when required, should be done with care to avoid scratching or soiling of the filter. C 173/92 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Appendix 5 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE 1. CALIBRATION OF THE ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTS 1. 1. Introduction Each analyser shall be calibrated as often as necessary to fulfil the accuracy requirements of this Directive. The calibration method that shall be used is described in this section for the analysers indicated in Annex III, Appendix 4, Section 3 and Annex V, Section 1. 1. 2. Calibration gases The shelf life of all calibration gases must be respected. The expiration date of the calibration gases stated by the manufacturer shall be recorded. 1. 2. 1. Pure gases The required purity of the gases is defined by the contamination limits given below. The following gases must be available for operation: Purified nitrogen (Contamination # 1 ppm C1, # 1 ppm CO, # 400 ppm CO2, # 0,1 ppm NO) Purified oxygen (Purity. 99,5 % vol O2) Hydrogen-helium mixture (40 ± 2 % hydrogen, balance helium) (Contamination # 1 ppm C1, # 400 ppm CO2) Purified synthetic air (Contamination # 1 ppm C1, # 1 ppm CO, # 400 ppm CO2, # 0,1 ppm NO) (Oxygen content between 18-21 %vol. ) Purified propane or CO for the CVS verification 1. 2. 2. Calibration and span gases Mixtures of gases having the following chemical compositions shall be available: C3H8 and purified synthetic air (see Section 1. 2. 1); CO and purified nitrogen; NOx and purified nitrogen (the amount of NO2 contained in this calibration gas must not exceed 5 % of the NO content); CO2 and purified nitrogen CH4 and purified synthetic air C2H6 and purified synthetic air Note: Other gas combinations are allowed provided the gases do not react with one another. The true concentration of a calibration and span gas must be within ± 2 % of the nominal value. All concentrations of calibration gas shall be given on a volume basis (volume percent or volume ppm). The gases used for calibration and span may also be obtained by means of a gas divider, diluting with purified N2 or with purified synthetic air. The accuracy of the mixing device must be such that the concentration of the diluted calibration gases may be determined to within ± 2 %. 1. 3. Operating procedure for analysers and sampling system The operating procedure for analysers shall follow the start-up and operating instructions of the instrument manufacturer. The minimum requirements given in Sections 1. 4 to 1. 9 shall be included. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/93 1. 4. Leakage test A system leakage test shall be performed. The probe shall be disconnected from the exhaust system and the end plugged. The analyser pump shall be switched on. After an initial stabilisation period all flow meters should read zero. If not, the sampling lines shall be checked and the fault corrected. The maximum allowable leakage rate on the vacuum side shall be 0,5 % of the in-use flow rate for the portion of the system being checked. The analyser flows and by-pass flows may be used to estimate the in-use flow rates. Another method is the introduction of a concentration step change at the beginning of the sampling line by switching from zero to span gas. If after an adequate period of time the reading shows a lower concentration compared to the introduced concentration, this points to calibration or leakage problems. 1. 5. Calibration procedure 1. 5. 1. Instrument assembly The instrument assembly shall be calibrated and calibration curves checked against standard gases. The same gas flow rates shall be used as when sampling exhaust. 1. 5. 2. Warming-up time The warming-up time should be according to the recommendations of the manufacturer. If not specified, a minimum of two hours is recommended for warming up the analysers. 1. 5. 3. NDIR and HFID analyser The NDIR analyser shall be tuned, as necessary, and the combustion flame of the HFID analyser shall be optimised (Section 1. 8. 1). 1. 5. 4. Calibration Each normally used operating range shall be calibrated. Using purified synthetic air (or nitrogen, the CO, CO2, NOx and HC analysers shall be set at zero. The appropriate calibration gases shall be introduced to the analysers, the values recorded, and the calibration curve established according to Section 1. 5. 5. The zero setting shall be rechecked and the calibration procedure repeated, if necessary. 1. 5. 5. Establishment of the calibration curve 1. 5. 5. 1. G e n e r a l g u i d e l i n e s The analyser calibration curve shall be established by at least five calibration points (excluding zero) spaced as uniformly as possible. The highest nominal concentration must be equal to or higher than 90 % of full scale. The calibration curve shall be calculated by the method of least squares. If the resulting polynomial degree is greater than 3, the number of calibration points (zero included) must be at least equal to this polynomial degree plus 2. The calibration curve must not differ by more than 6 2 % form the nominal value of each calibration point and by more than 6 1 % of full scale at zero. From the calibration curve and the calibration points, it is possible to verify that the calibration has been carried out correctly. The different characteristic parameters of the analyser must be indicated, particularly: — the measuring range; — the sensitivity; — the date of carrying out the calibration. C 173/94 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 1. 5. 5. 2. C a l i b r a t i o n b e l o w 1 5 % of full scale The analyser calibration curve shall be established by at least four additional calibration points (excluding zero) spaced nominally equally below 15 % of full scale. The calibrations curve is calculated by the method of least squares. The calibrations curve must not differ by more than 6 4 % from the nominal value of each calibration point and by more than 6 1 % of full scale at zero. 1. 5. 5. 3. A l t e r n a t i v e m e t h o d s If it can be shown that alternative technology (for example, electronically-controlled range switch, etc. ) can give equivalent accuracy, then these alternatives may be used. 1. 6. Verification of the calibration Each normally used operating range shall be checked prior to each analysis in accordance with the following procedure. The calibration shall be checked by using a zero gas and a span gas whose nominal value is more than 80 % of full scale of the measuring range. If, for the two points considered, the value found does not differ by more than ± 4 % of full scale from the declared reference value, the adjustment parameters may be modified. Should this not be the case, a new calibration curve shall be established in accordance with Section 1. 5. 5. 1. 7. Efficiency test of the NOx converter The efficiency of the converter used for the conversion of NO2 into NO shall be tested as given in Sections 1. 7. 1 to 1. 7. 8 (Figure 6). 1. 7. 1. Test set-up Using the test set-up as shown in Figure 6 (see also Annex III, Appendix 4, Sectin 3. 3. 5) and the procedure below, the efficiency of converters can be tested by means of an ozonator. 1. 7. 2. Calibration The CLD and the HCLD shall be calibrated in the most common operating range following the manufacturer’s specifications using zero and span gas (the NO content of which must amount to about 80 % of the operating range and the NO2 concentration of the gas mixture to less than 5 % of the NO concentration). The NOx analyser must be in the NO mode so that the span gas does not pass through the converter. The indicated concentration has to be recorded. 1. 7. 3. Calculation The efficiency of the NOx converter is calculated as follows: Efficiency (%) =(1 + a – b c – d)* 100 where: a b c d is the NOx concentration according to Section 1. 7. 6 is the NOx concentration according to Section 1. 7. 7 is the NO concentration according to Section 1. 7. 4 is the NO concentration according to Section 1. 7. 5. 1. 7. 4. Adding of oxygen Via a T-fitting, oxygen or zero air is added continuously to the gas flow until the concentration indicated is about 20 % less than the indicated calibration concentration given in Section 1. 7. 2. (The analyser is in the NO mode). The indicated concentration c shall be recorded. The ozonator is kept deactivated throughout the process. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/95 1. 7. 5. Activation of the ozonator The ozonator is now activated to generate enough ozone to bring the NO concentration down to about 20 % (minimum 10 %) of the calibration concentration given in Section 1. 7. 2. The indicated concentration d shall be recorded (The analyser is in the NO mode). 1. 7. 6. NOx mode The NO analyser is then switched to the NOx mode so that the gas mixture (consisting of NO, NO2, O2 and N2) now passes through the converter. The indicated concentration a shall be recorded. (The analyser is in the NOx mode). 1. 7. 7. Deactivation of the ozonator The ozonator is now deactivated. The mixture of gases described in Section 1. 7. 6 passes through the converter into the detector. The indicated concentration b shall be recorded. (The analyser is in the NOx mode). 1. 7. 8. NO mode Switched to NO mode with the ozonator deactivated, the flow of oxygen or synthetic air is also shut off. The NOx reading of the analyser shall not deviate by more than ± 5 % from the value measured according to Section 1. 7. 2. (The analyser is in the NO mode). 1. 7. 9. Test interval The efficiency of the converter must be tested prior to each calibration of the NOx analyser. 1. 7. 10. Efficiency requirement The efficiency of the converter shall not be less than 90 %, but a higher efficiency of 95 % is strongly recommended. Note: If, with the analyser in the most common range, the ozonator cannot give a reduction from 80 % to 20 % according to Section 1. 7. 5. then the highest range which will give the reduction shall be used. Figure 6 Schematic of NO2 converter efficiency device Solenoid valve O2 AC NO/N2 Variac Ozonator To analyser 1. 8. Adjustment of the FID 1. 8. 1. Optimisation of the detector response The FID must be adjusted as specified by the instrument manufacturer. A propane in air span gas should be used to optimise the response on the most common operating range. C 173/96 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 With the fuel and air flow rates set at the manufacturer’s recommendations, a 350 6 75 ppm C span gas shall be introduced to the analyser. The response at a given fuel flow shall be determined from the difference between the span gas response and the zero gas response. The fuel flow shall be incrementally adjusted above and below the manufacturer’s specification. The span and zero response at these fuel flows shall be recorded. The difference between the span and zero response shall be plotted and the fuel flow adjusted to the rich side of the curve. 1. 8. 2. Hydrocarbon response factors The analyser shall be calibration using propane in air and purified synthetic air, according to Section 1. 5. Response factors shall be determined when introducing an analyser into service and after major service intervals. The response factor (Rf) for a particular hydrocarbon species is the rations of the FID C1 reading to the gas concentration in the cylinder expressed by ppm C1. The concentration of the test gas must be at a level to give a response of approximately 80 % of full scale. The concentration must be known to an accuracy of 6 2 % in reference to a in volume. In addition, the gas cylinder must be gravimetric standard expressed preconditioned for 24 hours at a temperature of 298 K 6 5 K (25° C 6 5° C). The test gases to be used and the recommended relative response factor ranges are as follows: Methane and purified synthetic air 1,00 # Rf # 1,15 Propylene and purified synthetic air 0,90 # Rf # 1,1 Toluene and purified synthetic air 0,90 # Rf # 1,10 These values are relative to the response factor (Rf) of 1,00 for propane and purified synthetic air. 1. 8. 3. Oxygen interference check The oxygen interference check shall be determined when introducing an analyser into service and after major service intervals. The response factor is defined and shall be determined as described in Section 1. 8. 2. The test gas to be used and the recommended relative response factor range are as follows: Propane and nitrogen 0,95 # Rf # 1,05 This value is relative to the response factor (Rf) of 1,00 for propane and purified synthetic air. The FID burner air oxygen concentration must be within 6 1 mole % of the oxygen concentration of the burner air used in the latest oxygen interference check. If the difference is greater, the oxygen interference must be checked and the analyser adjusted, if necessary. 1. 8. 4. Efficiency of the non-methane cutter (NMC, for NG-fuelled gas engines only) The NMC is used for the removal of the non-methane hydrocarbons from the sample gas by oxidising all hydrocarbons except methane. Ideally, the conversion for methane is 0 %, and for the other hydrocarbons represented by ethane is 100 %. For the accurate measurement of NMHC, the two efficiencies shall be determined and used for the calculation of the NMHC emission mass flow rate (see Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 4. 3). 1. 8. 4. 1. M e t h a n e e f f i c i e n c y Methane calibration gas shall be flown through the FID with and without by-passing the NMC and the two concentrations recorded. The efficiency shall be determined as follows: CEM = 1 − concw concw/o where: concw = HC concentration with CH4 flowing through the NMC concw/o = HC concentration with CH4 by-passing the NMC 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/97 1. 8. 4. 2. E t h a n e e f f i c i e n c y Ethane calibration gas shall be flown through the FID with and without by-passing the NMC and the two concentrations recorded. The efficiency shall be determined as follows: CEE = 1 − concw concw/o where: concw = HC concentration with C2H6 flowing through the NMC concw/o = HC concentration with C2H6 by-passing the NMC 1. 9. Interference effects with CO, CO2, and NOx analysers Gases present in the exhaust other than the one being analysed can interfere with the reading in several ways. Positive interference occurs in NDIR instruments where the interfering gas gives the same effect as the gas being measured, but to a lesser degree. Negative interference occurs in NDIR instruments by the interfering gas broadening the absorption band of the measured gas, and in CLD instruments by the interfering gas quenching the radiation. The interference checks in Sections 1. 9. 1. and 1. 9. 2. shall be performed prior to an analyser’s initial use and after major service intervals. 1. 9. 1. CO analyser interference check Water and CO2 can interfere with the CO analyser performance. Therefore, a CO2 span gas having a concentration of 80 to 100 % of full scale of the maximum operating range used during testing shall be bubbled through water at room temperature and the analyser response recorded. The analyser response must not be more than 1 % of full scale for ranges equal to or above 300 ppm or more than 3 ppm for ranges below 300 ppm. 1. 9. 2. NOx analyser quench checks The two gases of concern for CLD (and HCLD) analysers are CO2 and water vapour. Quench responses to these gases are proportional to their concentrations, and therefore require test techniques to determine the quench at the highest expected concentrations experienced during testing. 1. 9. 2. 1. C O 2 q u e n c h c h e c k A CO2 span gas having a concentration of 80 to 100 % of full scale of the maximum operating range shall be passed through the NDIR analyser and the CO2 value recorded as A. It shall the be diluted approximately 50 % with NO span gas and passed through the NDIR and (H)CLD, with the CO2 and NO values recorded as B and C, respectively. The CO2 shall then be shutt off and only the NO span gas be passed through the (H)CLD and the NO value recorded as D. The quench, which must not be greater than 3 % of full scale, shall be calculated as follows: % Quench =[1 – ( (C * A) (D * A)–(D * B))]* 100 where, A is the undiluted CO2 concentration measured with NDIR in % B is the diluted CO2 concentration measured with NDIR in % C is the diluted NO concentration measured with (H)CLD in ppm D is the undiluted NO concentration measured with (H)CLD in ppm Alternative methods of diluting and quantifying of CO2 and NO span gas values such as dynamic mixing/blending can be used. 1. 9. 2. 2. W a t e r q u e n c h c h e c k This check applies to wet gas concentration measurements only. Calculation of water quench must consider dilution of the NO span gas with water vapour and scaling of water vapour concentration of the mixture to that expected during testing. C 173/98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 A NO span gas having a concentration of 80 to 100 % of full scale of the normal operating range shall be passed through the (H)CLD and the NO value recorded as D. The NO span gas shall then be bubbled through water at room temperature and passed through the (H)CLD and the NO value recorded as C. The analyser’s absolute operating pressure and the water temperature shall be determined and recorded as E and F, respectively. The mixture’s saturation vapour pressure that corresponds to the bubbler water temperature F shall be determined and recorded as G. The water vapour concentration (H, in %) of the mixture shall be calculated as follows: H = 100 *(G/E) The expected diluted NO span gas (in water vapour) concentration (De) shall be calculated as follows: De = D *(1- H/100) For diesel exhaust, the maximum exhaust water vapour concentration (Hm, in %) expected during testing shall be estimated, under the assumption of a fuel atom H/C ratio of 1,8:1, from the undiluted CO2 span gas concentration (A, as measured in Section 1. 9. 2. 1) as follows: Hm = 0,9 *A The water quench, which must not be greater than 3 %, shall be calculated as follows: % Quench = 100* ( ( De - C)/De) *(Hm/H) where: De is the expected diluted NO concentration in ppm C is the diluted NO concentration in ppm Hm is the maximum water vapour concentration in % H is the actual water vapour concentration in % Note: It is important that the NO span gas contains minimal NO2 concentration for this check, since absorption of NO2 in water has not been accounted for in the quench calculations. 1. 10. Calibration intervals The analysers shall be calibrated according to Section 1. 5 at least every three months or whenever a system repair or change is made that could influence calibration. 2. CALIBRATION OF THE CVS-SYSTEM 2. 1. General The CVS system shall be calibrated by using an accurate flowmeter traceable to national or international standards and a restricting device. The flow through the system shall be measured at different restriction settings, and the control parameters of the system shall be measured and related to the flow. Various types of flowmeters may be used, for example, calibrated venturi, calibrated laminar flowmeter, calibrated turbinemeter. 2. 2. Calibration of the positive displacement pump (PDP) All parameters related to the pump shall be simultaneously measured with the parameters related to the flowmeter which is connected in series with the pump. The calculated flow rate (in m3/min at pump inlet, absolute pressure and temperature) shall be plotted versus a correlation function which is the value of a specific combination of pump parameters. The linear equation which relates the pump flow and the correlation function shall then be determined. If a CVS has a multiple speed drive, the calibration shall be performed for each range used. Temperature stability shall be maintained during calibration. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/99 2. 2. 1. Data analysis The air flow rate (Qs) at each restriction setting (minimum six settings) shall be calculated in standard m3/min from the flowmeter data using the manufacturer’s prescribed method. The air flow rate shall then be converted to pump flow (V0) in m3/rev at absolute pump inlet temperature and pressure as follows: V0 = Qs n * T 273 * 101,3 PA where: Qs = air flow rate at standard conditions (101,3 kPa, 273 K), m3/s, T = temperature at pump inlet, K pA = absolute pressure at pump inlet (pB–p1), kPa, n = pump speed, rev/s To account for the interaction of pressure variations at the pump and the pump slip rate, the correlation function (X0) between pump speed, pressure differential from pump inlet to pump outlet and absolute pump outlet pressure shall be calculated as follows: *˛∆pp pp 1 n X0 = where: ∆pp = pressure differential from pump inlet to pump outlet, kPa, pA = absolute outlet pressure at pump outlet, kPa A linear least-square fit shall be performed to generate the calibration equation as follows: V0 = D0 – m * (X0) D0 and m are the intercept and slope constants, respectively, describing the regression lines. For a CVS system with multiple speeds, the calibration curves generated for the different pimp flow ranges shall be approximately parallel, and the intercept values (D0) shall increase as the pump flow range descreases. The calculated values from the equation shall be within 6 0,5 % of the measured value of V0. Values of m will vary frome one pump to another. Particulate influx over time will cause the pump slip to decrease, as recflected by lower values for m. Therefore, calibration shall be performed at pump start-up, after major maintenance, and if the total system verification (Section 2. 4) indicates a change of the slip rate. 2. 3. Calibration of the critical flow venturi (CFV) Calibration of the CFV is based upon the flow equation for a critical venturi. Gas flow is a function of inlet pressure and temperature, as shown below: Qs = Kv * pA ˛__ T where, Kv = calibration coefficient pA = absolute pressure at venturi inlet, kPa T = temperature at venturi inlet, K 2. 3. 1. Data analysis The air flow rate (Qs) at each restriction setting (minimum eight settings) shall be calculated in standard m3/min from the flowmeter data using the manufacturer’s prescribed method. The calibration coeffcient shall be calculated from the calibration data from each setting as follows: C 173/100 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 ˛__ T Kv = Qs * pA where, Qs = air flow rate at standard conditions (101,3 kPa, 273 K), m3/s, T temperature at the venturi inlet, K = pA = absolute pressure at venturi inlet, kPa To determine the range of critical flow, Kv shall be plotted as a function of venturi inlet pressure. For critical (choked) flow, Kv will have a relatively constant value. As pressure decreases (vacuum increases), the venturi becomes unchoked and Kv decreases, which indicates that the CFV is operated outside the permissible range. For a minimum of eight points in the region of critical flow, the average Kv and the standard deviation shall be calculated. The standard deviation shall not exceed 6 0,3 % of the average KV. 2. 4. Total system verification The total accuracy of the CVS sampling system and analytical system shall be determined by introducing a known mass of a pollutant gas into the system while it is being operated in the normal manner. The pollutant is analysed, and the mass calculated according to Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 4. 3 except in the case of propane where a factor of 0,000472 is used in place of 0,000479 for HC. Either of the following two techniques shall be used. 2. 4. 1. Metering with a critical flow orifice A known quantity of pure gas (carbon monoxide or propane) shall be fed into the CVS system through a calibrated critical orifice. If the inlet pressure is high enough, the flow rate, which is adjusted by means of the critical flow orifice, is independent of the orifice outlet pressure (; critical flow). The CVS system shall be operated as in a normal exhaust emission test for about 5 to 10 minutes. A gas sample shall be analysed with the usual equipment (sampling bag or integrating method), and the mass of the gas calculated. The mass so determined shall be within 6 3 % of the known mass of the gas injected. 2. 4. 2. Metering by means of a gravimetric technique The weight of a small cylinder filled with carbon monoxide or propane shall be determined with a precision of 6 0,01 gram. For about 5 to 10 minutes, the CVS system shall be operated as in a normal exhaust emission test, while carbon monoxide or propane is injected into the system. The quantity of pure gas discharged shall be determined by means of differential weighing. A gas sample shall be analysed with the usual equipment (sampling bag or integrating method), and the mass of the gas calculated. The mass so determined shall be within ± 3 % of the known mass of the gas injected. 3. CALIBRATION OF THE PARTICULATE MEASURING SYSTEM 3. 1. Introduction Eeach component shall be calibrated as often as necessary to fulfil the accuracy requirements of this Directive. The calibration method to be used is described in this section for the components indicated in Annex III, Appendix 4, Section 4 and Annex V, Section 2. 3. 2. Flow measurement The calibration of gas flow meters or flow measurement instrumentation shall be traceable to international and/or national standards. The maximum error of the measured value shall be within 6 2 % of reading. If the gas flow is determined by differential flow measurement, the maximum error of the difference shall be such that the accuracy of GEDF is within 6 4 % (see also Annex V, Section 2. 2. 1, EGA). It can be calculated by taking the root-mean-square of the errors of each instrument. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/101 3. 3. Checking the partial flow conditions The range of the exhaust gas velocity and the pressure oscillations shall be checked and adjusted according to the requirements of Annex V, Section 2. 2. 1, EP, if applicable. 3. 4. Calibration intervals The flow measurement instrumentation shall be calibrated at least every three months or whenever a system repair or change is made that could influence calibration. 4. 4. 1. CALIBRATION OF THE SMOKE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT Introduction The opacimeter shall be calibrated as often as necessary to fulfil the accuracy requirements of this Directive. The calibration method to be used is described in this section for the components indicated in Annex III. Appendix 4, Section 5 and Annex V, Section 3. 4. 2. Calibration procedure 4. 2. 1. Warming-up time The opacimeter shall be warmed up and stabilised according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. If the opacimeter is equipped with a purge air system to prevent sooting of the instrument optics, this system should also be activated and adjusted according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. 2. 2. Establishment of the linearity response The linearity of the opacimeter shall be checked in the opacity readout mode as per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Three neutral density filters of known transmittance, which shall meet the requirements of Annex III, Appendix 4, Section 5. 2. 5, shall be introduced to the opacimeter and the value recorded. The neutral density filters shall have nominal opacities of approximately 10 %, 20 % and 40 %. The linearity must not differ by more than 6 2 % opacity from the nominal value of the neutral density filter. Any non-linearity exceeding the above value must be corrected prior to the test. 4. 3. Calibration intervals The opacimeter shall be calibrated according to Section 4. 2. 2 at least every three months or whenever a system repair or change is made that could influence calibration. C 173/102 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 ANNEX IV TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF REFERENCE FUEL PRESCRIBED FOR APPROVAL TESTS AND TO VERIFY CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION 1. DIESEL FUEL (1) Parameter Unit Test method (3) Minimum Maximum Limits (2) Cetane number (4) Density at 15 °C Distillation (5): — 50 % point — 95 % point — final boiling point Flash point CFPP Viscosity at 40 °C Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons Sulphur content Copper corrosion Conradson carbon residue (10 % DR) Ash content Water content Neutralisation (strong acid) number Oxidation stability (6) kg/m³ °C °C °C °C °C mm²/s % m/m % m/m % m/m % m/m % m/m KOH/g mg/100 ml 52 833 245 345 — 55 — 2,5 3,0 — — — — — — — 54 837 350 370 — − 5 3,5 6,0 0,03 1 0,2 0,01 0,05 0,20 2,5 ISO 5165 ISO 3675 ISO 3405 ISO 3405 ISO 3405 ASTM D 93 EN 116 ASTM D 445 pr IP 391 ISO 8754 ASTM D 130 ASTM D 189 ASTM D 482 ASTM D 95/D 1744 ASTM D 2274 (1) If it is required to calculate the thermal efficiency of an engine or vehicle, the calorific value of the fuel can be calculated from: Specific energy (calorific value) (net) in MJ/kg = (46,423 − 8,792d² + 3,170d) (1 − (x + y + s)) + 9,420s − 2,499x where, d = x = y = s = the density at 15 °C the proportion by mass of water (% divided by 100) the proportion by mass of ash (% divided by 100) the proportion by mass of sulphur (% divided by 100). (2) The values quoted in the specification are ‘true values’. In establishment of their limit values the terms of ISO 4259, Petroleum products — Determination and application of precision data in relation to methods of test, have been applied and in fixing a minimum value, a minimum difference of 2R above zero has been taken into account; in fixing a maximum and minimum value, the minimum difference is 4R (R = reproducibility). Notwithstanding this measure, which is necessary for statistical reasons, the manufacturer of a fuel should nevertheless aim at a zero value where the stipulated maximum value is 2R and at the mean value in the case of quotations of maximum and minimum limits. Should it be necessary to clarify the question as to whether a fuel meets the requirements of the specification, the terms of ISO 4259 should be applied. (3) Equivalent ISO methods will be adopted when issued for all properties listed above. (4) The range for cetane number is not in accordance with the requirement of a minimum range of 4R. However, in the case of dispute between fuel supplier and fuel user, the terms in ISO 4259 can be used to resolve such disputes provided replicate measurements, of sufficient number to achieve the necessary precision, are made in preference to single determinations. (5) The figures quoted show the total evaporated quantities (percentage recovered + percentage loss). (6) Even though oxidation stability is controlled, it is likely that self life will be limited. Advice should be sought from the supplier as to storage conditions and life. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/103 2. NATURAL GAS (NG) European market fuels are available in two ranges: — the H range, whose extreme reference fuels are G20 and G23; — the L range, whose extreme reference fuels are G23 and G25. The characteristics of G20, G23 and G25 reference fuels are summarised below: Reference fuel G20 Characteristics Units Basis Test method Min. Max. Limits Composition: Methane Balance [Inerts + C2/C2+] N2 % mole 100 — 99 — 100 1 ISO 6974 Sulphur content mg/m³(*) — — 50 ISO 6326-5 (*) Value to be determined at standard conditions (293,2 K (20 °C) and 101,3 kPa). Reference fuel G23 Characteristics Units Basis Test method Limits Composition: Methane Balance [Inerts + C2/C2+] N2 % mole Sulphur content mg/m³(*) Min. Max. 91,5 — 6,5 — 93,5 1 8,5 50 92,5 — 7,5 — ISO 6974 ISO 6326-5 (*) Value to be determined at standard conditions (293,2 K (20 °C) and 101,3 kPa). Reference fuel G25 Characteristics Units Basis Test method Limits Composition: Methane Balance [Inerts + C2/C2+] N2 % mole Sulphur content mg/m³(*) Min. Max. 84 — 12 — 88 1 16 50 ISO 6974 ISO 6326-5 86 — 14 — (*) Value to be determined at standard conditions (293,2 K (20 °C) and 101,3 kPa). C 173/104 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 3. LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS (LPG) Parameter Unit Limits fuel A Limits fuel B Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum 93,5 93,5 Motor octane number Composition C3 content C4 content Olefins Evaporation residue Total sulphur content Hydrogen sulphide Copper strip corrosion Water at 0 °C % vol % vol % vol mg/kg 48 48 0 ppm weight (1) — Rating 52 52 12 50 50 None Class 1 Free Test method EN 589 Annex B ISO 7941 NFM 41-015 EN 24260 83 13 9 87 17 15 50 50 None ISO 8819 Class 1 ISO 6251 (2) Free Visual inspection (1) Value to be determined at standard conditions 293,2 K (20 °C) and 101,3 kPa. (2) This method may not accurately determine the presence of corrosive materials if the sample contains corrosion inhibitors or other chemicals which diminish the corrosivity of the sample to the copper strip. Therefore, the addition of such compounds for the sole purpose of biasing the test method is prohibited. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/105 ANNEX V ANALYTICAL AND SAMPLING SYSTEMS 1. DETERMINATION OF THE GASEOUS EMISSIONS 1. 1. Introduction Section 1. 2 and Figures 7 and 8 contain detailed descriptions of the recommended sampling and analysing systems. Since various configurations can produce equivalent results, exact conformance with Figures 7 and 8 is not required. Additional components such as instruments, valves, solenoids, pumps, and switches may be used to provide additional information and coordinate the functions of the component systems. Other components which are not needed to maintain the accuracy on some systems, may be excluded if their exclusion is based upon good engineering judgement. Figure 7 Flow diagram of raw exhaust gas analysis system for CO, CO2, NOx, HC ESC only zero gas zero gas zero gas span gas vent vent air fuel optional 2 sampling probes zero gas span gas zero gas span gas vent vent vent zero gas span gas vent vent 1. 2. Description of the analytical system An analytical system for the determination of the gaseous emissions in the raw (Figure 7, ESC only) or diluted (Figure 8, ETC and ESC) exhaust as is described based on the use of: — HFID analyser for the measurement of hydrocarbons; — NDIR analysers for the measurement of carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide; — HCLD or equivalent analyser for the measurement of the oxides of nitrogen; The sample for all components may be taken with one sampling probe or with two sampling probes located in close proximity and internally split to the different analysers. Care must be taken that no condensation of exhaust components (including water and sulphuric acid) occurs at any point of the analytical system. C 173/106 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Flow diagram of diluted exhaust gas analysis system for CO, CO2, NOx, HC ETC, optional for ESC Figure 8 to PSS see Figure 21 zero gas same plane see Figure 21 see Figure 20 zero gas span gas vent vent air fuel vent vent zero gas span gas zero gas span gas vent zero gas span gas vent vent 1. 2. 1. Components of Figures 7 and 8 EP Exhaust pipe SP1 Exhaust gas sampling probe (Figure 7 only) A stainless steel straight closed end multi-hole probe is recommended. The inside diameter shall not be greater than the inside diameter of the sampling line. The wall thickness of the probe shall not be greater than 1 mm. There shall be a minimum of three holes in three different radial planes sized to sample approximately the same flow. The probe must extend across at least 80 % of the diameter of the exhaust pipe. One or two sampling probes may be used. SP2 Diluted exhaust gas HC sampling probe (Figure 8 only) The probe shall: — be defined as the first 254 mm to 762 mm of the heated sampling line HSL1; — have a 5 mm minimum inside diameter; — be installed in the dilution tunnel DT (see Section 2. 3, Figure 20) at a point where the dilution air and exhaust gas are well mixed (i. e. approximately 10 tunnel diameters downstream of the point where the exhaust enters the dilution tunnel); — be sufficiently distant (radially) from other probes and the tunnel wall so as to be free from the influence of any wakes or eddies; — be heated so as to increase the gas stream temperature to 463 K 6 10 K (190°C 6 10°C) at the exit of the probe. SP3 Diluted exhaust gas CO, CO2, NOx sampling probe (Figure 8 only) The probe shall: — be in the same plane as SP 2; — be sufficiently distant (radially) from other probes and the tunnel wall so as to be free from the influence of any wakes or eddies; — be heated and insulated over its entire length to a minimum temperature of 328 K (55°C) to prevent water condensation. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/107 HSL1 Heated sampling line The sampling line provides a gas sample from a single probe to the split point(s) and the HC analyser. The sampling line shall: — have a 5 mm minimum and a 13,5 mm maximum inside diameter: — be made of stainless steel or PTFE. — maintain a wall temperature of 463 K 6 10 K (190°C 6 10°C) as measured at every separately controlled heated section, if the temperature of the exhaust gas at the sampling probe is equal to or below 463 K (190°C); — maintain a wall temperature greater than 453 K (180°C), if the temperature of the exhaust gas at the sampling probe is above 463 K (190°C); — maintain a gas temperature of 463 K 6 10K (190°C 6 10°C) immediately before the heated filter F2 and the HFID; HSL2 Heated NOx sampling line The sampling line shall: — maintain a wall temperature of 328 K to 473 K (55°C to 200°C), up to the converter C when using a cooling bath B, and up to the analyser when a cooling bath B is not used. — be made of stainless steel or PTFE. SL Sampling line for CO and CO2 The line shall be made of PTFE or stainless steel. It may be heated or unheated. BK Background bag (optional; Figure 8 only) For the sampling of the background concentrations BG Sample bag (optional; Figure 8 CO and CO2 only) For the sampling of the sample concentrations. F1 Heated pre-filter (optional) The temperature shall be the same as HSL1. F2 Heated filter The filter shall extract any solid particles from the gas sample prior to the analyser. The temperature shall be the same as HSL 1. The filter shall be changed as needed. P Heated sampling pump The pump shall be heated to the temperature of HSL1. HC Heated flame ionisation detector (HFID) for the determination of the hydrocarbons. The temperature shall be kept at 453 K to 473 K (180°C to 200°C). CO, CO2 NDIR analysers for the determination of carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide (optional for the determination of the dilution ratio for PT measurement). NO CLD or HCLD analyser for the determination of the oxides of nitrogen. If a HCLD is used it shall be kept at a temperature of 328 K to 473 K (55°C to 200°C). C Converter A converter shall be used for the catalytic reduction of NO2 to NO prior to analysis in the CLD or HCLD. C 173/108 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 B Cooling bath (optional) To cool and condense water from the exhaust sample. The bath shall be maintained at a temperature of 273 K to 277 K (0°C to 4°C) by ice or refrigeration. It is optional if the analyser is free from water vapour interference as determined in Annex III, Appendix 5, Sections 1. 9. 1 and 1. 9. 2. If water is removed by condensation, the sample gas temperature or dew point shall be monitored either within the water trap or downstream. The sample gas temperature or dew point must not exceed 280 K (7°C). Chemical dryers are not allowed for removing water from the sample. T1, T2, T3 Temperature sensor To monitor the temperature of the gas stream. T4 Temperature sensor To monitor the temperature of the NO2 — NO converter. T5 Temperature sensor To monitor the temperature of the cooling bath. G1, G2, G3 Pressure gauge To measure the pressure in the sampling lines. R1, R2 Pressure regulator To control the pressure of the air and the fuel, respectively, for the HFID. R3, R4, R5 Pressure regulator To control the pressure in the sampling lines and the flow to the analysers. FL1, FL2, FL3 Flowmeter To monitor the sample by-pass flow rate. FL4 to FL6 Flowmeter (optional) To monitor the flow rate through the analysers. V1 to V5 Selector valve Suitable valving for selecting sample, span gas or zero gas flow to the analysers. V6, V7 Solenoid valve To by-pass the NO2 — NO converter. V8 Needle valve To balance the flow through the NO2 — NO converter C and the by-pass. V9, V10 Needle valve To regulate the flows to the analysers. V11, V12 Toggle valve (optional) To drain the condensate from the bath B. 1. 3. NMHC Analysis (G-fuelled gas engines only) 1. 3. 1. Gas chromatographic method (GC, Figure 9) When using the GC method, a small measured volume of a sample is injected onto an analytical column through which it is swept by an inert carrier gas. The column separates various components according to their boiling points so that they elude from the column at different times. They then pass through a detector which gives an electrical signal that depends on their concentration. Since it is not a continuous analysis technique, it can only be used in conjunction with the bag sampling method as described in Annex III. Appendix 4, Section 3. 4. 2. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/109 For NMHC an automated GC with a FID shall be used. The exhaust gas shall be sampled into a sampling bag from which a part shall be taken and injected into the GC. The sample is separated into two parts (CH4/Air/CO and NMHC/CO2/H2O) on the Porapak column. The molecular sieve column separates CH4 from the air and CO before passing it to the FID where its concentration is measured. A complete cycle from injection of one sample to injection of a second can be made in 30 s. To determine NMHC, the CH4 concentration shall be subtracted from the total HC concentration (see Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 4. 3. 1). Figure 9 shows a typical GC assembled to routinely determine CH4. Other GC methods can also be used based on good engineering judgement. Figure 9 Flow diagram for methane analysis (GC method) y to x fuel inlet air inlet vent x to y Oven sample vent span gas Components of Figure 9 PC Porapak column Porapak N, 180/300 µm (50/80 mesh), 610 mm length × 2,16 mm ID shall be used and conditioned at least 12 h at 423 K (150°C) with carrier gas prior to initial use. MSC Molecular sieve column Type 13X, 250/350 µm (45/60 mesh), 1220 mm length × 2,16 mm ID shall be used and conditioned at least 12 h at 423 K (150°C) with carrier gas prior to initial use. OV Oven To maintain columns and valves at stable temperature for analyser operation, and to condition the columns at 423 K (150°C). SLP Sample loop A sufficient length of stainless steel tubing to obtain approximately 1 cm3 volume. C 173/110 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 P Pump To bring the sample to the gas chromatograph. D Dryer A dryer containing molecular sieve shall be used to remove water and other contaminants which might be present in the carrier gas. HC Flame ionisation detector (FID) to measure the concentration of methane. V1 Sample injection valve To inject the sample taken from the sampling bag via SL of Figure 8. It shall be low dead volume, gas tight, and heatable to 423 K (150°C). V3 Selector valve To select span gas, sample, or no flow. V2, V4, V5, V6, V7, V8 Needle valve To set the flows in the system. R1, R2, R3 Pressure regulator To control the flows of the fuel (= carrier gas), the sample, and the air, respectively. FC Flow capillary To control the rate of air flow to the FID G1, G2, G3 Pressure gauge To control the flows of the fuel (= carrier gas), the sample, and the air, respectively. F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 Filter Sintered metal filters to prevent grit from entering the pump or the instrument. FL 1 To measure the sample by-pass flow rate. 1. 3. 2. Non-methane cutter method (NMC, Figure 10) The cutter oxidises all hydrocarbons except CH4 to CO2 and H2O, so that by passing the sample through the NMC only CH4 is detected by the FID. If bag sampling is used, a flow diverter system shall be installed at SL (see Section 1. 2, Figure 8) with which the flow can be alternatively passed through or around the cutter according to the upper part of Figure 10. For NMHC measurement, both values (HC and CH4)shall be observed on the FID and recorded. If the integration method is used, an NMC in line with a second FID shall be installed parallel to the regular FID into HSL1 (see Section 1. 2, Figure 8) according to the lower part of Figure 10. For NMHC measurement, the values of the two FID’s (HC and CH4) shall be observed and recorded. The cutter shall be characterised at or above 600 K (327°C) prior to test work with respect to its catalytic effect on CH4 at C2H6 at H2O values representative of exhaust stream conditions. The dewpoint and O2 level of the sampled exhaust stream must be known. The relative response of the FID to CH4 must be recorded (see Annex III, Appendix 5, Section 1. 8. 2). 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/111 Flow diagram for methane analysis with the non-methane cutter (NMC) Figure 10 vent vent vent zero span sample (see Figure 8) Bag sampling method zero span sample (see Figure 8) Integrating method Components of Figure 10 NMC Non-methane cutter To oxidise all hydrocarbons except methane. HC Heated flame ionisation detector (HFID) to measure the HC and CH4 concentrations. The temperature shall be kept at 453 K to 473 K (180°C to 200°C). V1 Selector valve To select sample, zero and span gas. V1 is identical with V2 of Figure 8. V2, V3 Solenoid valve To by-pass the NMC V4 Needle valve To balance the flow through the NMC and the by-pass. R1 Pressure regulator To control the pressure in the sampling line and the flow to the HFID. R1 is identical with R3 of Figure 8. FL1 Flowmeter To measure the sample by-pass flow rate. FL1 is identical with FL1 of Figure 8. C 173/112 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 2. 2. 1. EXHAUST GAS DILUTION AND DETERMINATION OF THE PARTICULATES Introduction Sections 2. 2, 2. 3 and 2. 4 and Figures 11 to 22 contain detailed descriptions of the recommended dilution and sampling systems. Since various configurations can produce equivalent results,, exact conformance with these figures is not required. Additional components such as instruments, valves, solenoids, pumps, and switches may be used to provide additional information and coordinate the functions of the component systems. Other components which are not needed to maintain the accuracy on some systems, may be excluded if their exclusion is based upon good engineering judgement. 2. 2. Partial flow dilution system A dilution system is described in Figures 11 to 19 based upon the dilution of a part of the exhaust stream. Splitting of the exhaust stream and the following dilution process may be done by different dilution system types. For subsequent collection of the particulates, the entire dilute exhaust gas or only a portion of the dilute exhaust gas is passed to the particulate sampling system (Section 2. 4, Figure 21). The first method is referred to as total sampling type, the second method as fractional sampling type. The calculation of the dilution ratio depends upon the type of system used. The following types are recommended: Isokinetic systems (Figures 11, 12) With these systems, the flow into the transfer tube is matched to the bulk exhaust flow in terms of gas velocity and/or pressure, thus requiring an undisturbed and uniform exhaust flow at the sampling probe. This is usually achieved by using a resonator and a straight approach tube upstream of the sampling point. The split ratio is then calculated from easily measurable values like tube diameters. It should be noted that isokinesis is only used for matching the flow conditions and not for matching the size distribution. The latter is typically not necessary, as the particles are sufficiently small as to follow the fluid streamlines. Flow-controlled systems with concentration measurement (Figures 13 to 17) With these systems, a sample is taken from the bulk exhaust stream by adjusting the dilution air flow and the total dilute exhaust flow. The dilution ratio is determined from the concentrations of tracer gases, such as CO2 or NOx naturally occurring in the engine exhaust. The concentrations in the dilute exhaust gas and in the dilution air are measured, whereas the concentration in the raw exhaust gas can be either measured directly or determined from fuel flow and the carbon balance equation, if the fuel composition is known. The systems may be controlled by the calculated dilution ratio (Figures 13, 14) or by the flow into the transfer tube (Figures 12, 13, 14). Flow controlled systems with flow measurement (Figures 18, 19) With these systems, a sample is taken from the bulk exhaust stream by setting the dilution air flow and the total dilute exhaust flow. The dilution ratio is determined from the difference of the two rates. Accurate calibration of the flow meters relative to one another is required, since the relative magnitude of the two flow rates can lead to significant errors at higher dilution ratios (of 15 and above). Flow control is very straightforward by keeping the dilute exhaust flow rate constant and varying the dilution air flow rate, if needed. When using partial flow dilution systems, attention must be paid to avoiding the potential problems of loss of particulates in the transfer tube, ensuring that a representative sample is taken from the engine exhaust, and determination of the split ratio. The systems described pay attention to these critical areas. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/113 Partial flow dilution system with isokinetic probe and fractional sampling (SB control) Figure 11 air vent see Figure 21 to particulate sampling system exhaust Raw exhaust gas is transferred from the exhaust pipe EP to the dilution tunnel DT through the transfer tube TT by the isokinetic sampling probe ISP. The differential pressure of the exhaust gas between exhaust pipe and inlet to the probe is measured with the pressure transducer DPT. This signal is transmitted to the flow controller FC1 that controls the suction blower SB to maintain a differential pressure of zero at the tip of the probe. Under these conditions, exhaust gas velocities in EP and ISP are identical, and the flow through ISP and TT is a constant fraction (split) of the exhaust gas flow. The split ratio is determined from the cross-sectional areas of EP and ISP. The dilution air flow rate is measured with the flow measurement device FM1. The dilution ratio is calculated from the dilution air flow rate and the split ratio. Partial flow dilution system with isokinetic probe and fractional sampling (PB control) Figure 12 air vent see Figure 21 to particulate sampling system exhaust Raw exhaust gas is transferred from the exhaust pipe EP to the dilution tunnel DT through the transfer tube TT by the isokinetic sampling probe ISP. The differential pressure of the exhaust gas between exhaust pipe and inlet to the probe is measured with the pressure transducer DPT. This signal is transmitted to the flow controller FC1 that controls the pressure blower PB tomaintain a differential pressure of zero at the tip of the probe. This is done by taking a small fraction of the dilution air whose flow rate has already been measured with the flow measurement device FM1, and feeding it to TT by means of a pneumatic orifice. Under these conditions, exhaust gas velocities in EP and ISP are identical, and the flow through ISP and TT is a constant fraction (split) of the exhaust gas flow. The split ratio C 173/114 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 is determined from the cros-sectional areas of EP and ISP. The dilution air is sucked through DT by the suction blower SB, and the flow rate is measured with FM1 at the inlet to DT. The dilution ratio is calculated from the dilution air flow rate and the split ratio. Partial flow dilution system with CO2 or NOx concentration measurement and fractional sampling Figure 13 optional to PB or SB air vent see Figure 21 to particulate sampling system exhaust Raw exhaust gas is transferred from the exhaust pipe EP to the dilution tunnel DT through the sampling probe SP and the transfer tube TT. The concentration of a tracer gas (CO2 or NOx) are measured in the raw and diluted exhaust gas as well as in the dilution air with the exhaust gas analyser(s) EGA. These signals are transmitted to the flow controller FC2 that controls either the pressure blower PB or the suction blower SB to maintain the desired exhaust split and dilution ratio in DT. The dilution ratio is calculated from the tracer gas concentrations in the raw exhaust gas, the diluted exhaust gas, and the dilution air. Partial flow dilution system with CO2 concentration measurement, carbon balance and total sampling Figure 14 optional to P air optional from FC2 details see Figure 21 exhaust 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/115 Raw exhaust gas is transferred from the exhaust pipe EP to the dilution tunnel DT through the sampling probe SP and the transfer tube TT. The CO2 concentrations are measured in the diluted exhaust gas and in the dilution air with the exhaust gas analyser(s) EGA. The CO2 and fuel flow GFUEL signals are transmitted either to the flow controller FC2, or to the flow controller FC3 of the particulate sampling system (see Figure 21). FC2 controls the pressure blower PB, FC3 the sampling pump P (see Figure 21), thereby adjusting the flows into and out of the system so as to maintain the desired exhaust split and dilution ratio in DT. The dilution ratio is calculated from the CO2 concentrations and GFUEL using the carbon balance assumption. Partial flow dilution system with single venturi, concentration measurement and fractional sampling Figure 15 air vent see Figure 21 to particulate sampling system exhaust Raw exhaust gas is transferred from the exhaust pipe EP to the dilution tunnel DT through the sampling probe SP and the transfer tube TT due to the negative pressure created by the venturi VN in DT. The gas flow rate through TT depends on the momentum exchange at the venturi zone, and is therefore affected by the absolute temperature of the gas at the exit of TT. Consequently, the exhaust split for a given tunnel flow rate is not constant, and the dilution ratio at low load is slightly lower than a high load. The tracer gas concentrations (CO2 or NOx) are measured in the raw exhaust gas, the diluted exhaust gas, and the dilution air with the exhaust gas analyser(s) EGA, and the dilution ratio is calculated from the values so measured. C 173/116 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Partial flow dilution system with twin venturi or twin orifice, concentration measurement and fractional sampling Figure 16 see Figure 21 to particulate sampling system vent air exhaust Raw exhaust gas is transferred from the exhaust pipe EP to the dilution tunnel DT through the sampling probe SP and the transfer tube TT by a flow divider that contains a set of orifices or venturis. The first one (FD1) is located in EP, the second one (FD2) in TT. Additionally, two pressure control valves (PCV1 and PCV2) are necessary to maintain a constant exhaust split by controlling the backpressure in EP and the pressure in DT. PCV1 is located downstream of SP in EP, PCV2 between the pressure blower PB and DT. The tracer gas concentrations (CO2 or NOx) are measured in the raw exhaust gas, the diluted exhaust gas, and the dilution air with the exhaust gas analyser(s) EGA. They are necessary for checking the exhaust split, and may be used to adjust PCV1 and PCV2 for precise split control. The dilution ratio is calculated from the tracer gas concentrations. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/117 Partial flow dilution system with multiple tube splitting, concentration measurement and fractional sampling Figure 17 air fresh air injection see Figure 21 to particulate sampling system vent air Raw exhaust gas is transferred from the exhaust pipe EP to the dilution tunnel DT through the transfer tube TT by the flow divider FD3 that consists of a number of tubes of the same dimensions (same diameter, length and bend radius) installed in EP. The exhaust gas through one of these tubes is lead to DT, and the exhaust gas through the rest of the tubes is passed through the damping chamber DC. Thus, the exhaust split is determined by the total number of tubes. A constant split control requires a differential pressure of zero between DC and the outlet of TT, which is measured with the differential pressure transducer DPT. A differential pressure of zero is achieved by injecting fresh air into DT at the outlet of TT. The tracer gas concentrations (CO2 or NOx) are measured in the raw exhaust gas, the diluted exhaust gas, and the dilution air with the exhaust gas analyser(s) EGA. They are necessary for checking the exhaust split and may be used to control the injection air flow rate for precise split control. The dilution ratio is calculated from the tracer gas concentrations. C 173/118 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Partial flow dilution system with flow control and total sampling Figure 18 ar GEXH or GAIR or GFUEL optional to P (PSS) exhaust vent details see Figure 21 Raw exhaust gas is transferred from the exhaust pipe EP to the dilution tunnel DT through the sampling probe SP and the transfer tube TT. The total flow through the tunnel is adjusted with the flow controller FC3 and the sampling pump P of the particulate sampling system (see Figure 18). The dilution air flow is controlled by the flow controller FC2, which may use GEXHW, GAIRW, or GFUEL as command signals, for the desired exhaust split. The sample flow into DT is the difference of the total flow and the dilution air flow. The dilution air flow rate is measured with the flow measurement device FM1, the total flow rate with the flow measurement device FM3 of the particulate sampling system (see Figure 21). The dilution ratio is calculated from these two flow rates. Partial flow dilution system with flow control and fractional sampling Figure 19 to PB or SB air GEXH or GAIR or GFUEL see Figure 21 to particulate sampling system see Figure 21 exhaust vent 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/119 Raw exhaust gas is transferred from the exhaust pipe EP to the dilution tunnel DT through the sampling probe SP and the transfer tube TT. The exhaust split and the flow into DT is controlled by the flow controller FC2 that adjusts the flows (or speeds) of the pressure blower PB and the suction blower SB, accordingly. This is possible since the sample taken with the particulate sampling system is returned into DT. GEXHW, GAIRW, or GFUEL may be used as command signals for FC2. The dilution air flow rate is measured with the flow measurement device FM1, the total flow with the flow measurement device FM2. The dilution ratio is calculated from these two flow rates. 2. 2. 1. Components of Figures 11 to 19 EP Exhaust pipe The exhaust pipe may be insulated. To reduce the thermal inertia of the exhaust pipe a thickness to diameter ratio of 0,015 or less is recommended. The use of flexible sections shall be limited to a length to diameter ratio of 12 or less. Bends shall be minimised to reduce inertial deposition. If the system includes a test bed silencer the silencer may also be insulated. For an isokinetic system, the exhaust pipe must be free of elbows, bends and sudden diameter changes for at least six pipe diameters upstream and three pipe diameters downstream of the tip of the probe. The gas velocity at the sampling zone must be higher than 10 m/s except at idle mode. Pressure oscillations of the exhaust gas must not exceed 6 500 Pa on the average. Any steps to reduce pressure oscillations beyond using a chassis-type exhaust system (including silencer and after-treatment devices) must not alter engine performance nor cause the deposition of particulates. For systems without isokinetic probe, it is recommended to have a straight pipe of six pipe diameters upstream and three pipe diameters of the tip of the probe. SP Sampling probe (Figures 10, 14, 15, 16, 18, 19) The minimum inside diameter shall be 4 mm. The minimum diameter ratio between exhaust pipe and probe shall be 4. The probe shall be an open tube facing upstream on the exhaust pipe centreline, or a multiple hole probe as described under SP1 in Section 1. 2. 1, Figure 5. ISP Isokinetic sampling probe (Figures 11, 12) The isokinetic sampling probe must be installed facing upstream on the exhaust pipe centreline where the flow conditions in section EP are met, and designed to provide a proportional sample of the raw exhaust gas. The minimum inside diameter shall be 12 mm. A control system is necessary for isokinetic exhaust splitting by maintaining a differential pressure of zero between EP and ISP. Under these conditions exhaust gas velocities in EP and ISP are identical and the mass flow through ISP is a constant fraction of the exhaust gas flow. ISP has to be connected to a differential pressure transducer DPT. The control to provide a differential pressure of zero between EP and ISP is done with the flow controller FC1. FD1, FD2 Flow divider (Figure 16) A set of venturis or orifices is installed in the exhaust pipe EP and in the transfer tube TT, respectively, to provide a proportional sample of the raw exhaust gas. A control system consisting of two pressure control valves PCV1 and PCV2 is necessary for proportional splitting by controlling the pressures in EP and DT. FD3 Flow divider (Figure 17) A set of tubes (multiple tube unit) is installed in the exhaust pipe EP to provide a proportional sample of the raw exhaust gas. One of the tubes feeds exhaust gas to the dilution tunnel DT, whereas the other tubes exit exhaust gas to a damping chamber DC. The tubes must have the same dimensions (same diameter, length, bend radius), so that the exhaust split depends on the total number of tubes. A control system is necessary for C 173/120 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 proportional splitting by maintaining a differential pressure of zero between the exit of the multiple tube unit into DC and the exit of TT. Under these conditions, exhaust gas velocities in EP and FD3 are proportional, and the flow TT is a constant fraction of the exhaust gas flow. The two points have to be connected to a differential pressure transducer DPT. The control to provide a differential pressure of zero is done with the flow controller FC1. EGA Exaust gas analyser (Figures 13, 14, 15, 16, 17) CO2 or NOx analysers may be used (with carbon balance method CO2 only). The analysers shall be calibrated like the analysers for the measurement of the gaseous emissions. One or several analysers may be used to determine the concentration differences. The accuracy of the measuring systems has to be such that the accuracy of GEDFW,i is within 6 4 %. TT Transfer tube (Figures 11 to 19) The transfer tube shall be: — As short as possible, but not more than 5 m in length. — Equal to or greater than the probe diameter, but not more than 25 mm in diameter. — Exiting on the centreline of the dilution tunnel and pointing downstream. If the tube is 1 m or less in length, it shall be insulated with material with a maximum thermal conductivity of 0,05 W/m*K with a radial insulation thickness corresponding to the diameter of the probe. If the tube is longer than 1 m, it must be insulated and heated to a minimum wall temperature of 523 K (250°C). DPT Differential pressure transducer (Figures 11, 12, 17) The differential pressure transducer shall have a range of 6 500 Pa or less. FC1 Flow controller (Figures 11, 12, 17) For isokinetic systems (Figures 11, 12), a flow controller is necessary to maintain a differential pressure of zero between EP and ISP. The adjustment can be done by: (a) controlling the speed or flow of the suction blower SB and keeping the speed or flow of the pressure blower PB constant during each mode (Figure 11), or (b) adjusting the suction blower SB to a constant mass flow of the diluted exhaust gas and controlling the flow of the pressure blower PB, and therefore the exhaust sample flow in a region at the end of the transfer tube TT (Figure 12). In the case of a pressure controlled system the remaining error in the control loop must not exceed 6 3 Pa. The pressure oscillations in the dilution tunnel must not exceed 6 250 Pa on the average. For a multi tube system (Figure 17), a flow controller is necessary for proportional exhaust splitting to maintain a differential pressure of zero between the exit of the multi tube unit and the exit of TT. The adjustment is done by controlling the injection air flow rate into DT at the exit of TT. PCV1, PCV2›Pressure control valve (Figure 16) Two pressure control valves are necessary for the twin venturi/twin orifice system for proportional flow splitting by controlling the backpressure of EP and the pressure in DT. The valves shall be located downstream of SP in EP and between PB and DT. DC Damping chamber (Figure 17) A damping chamber shall be installed at the exit of the multiple tube unit to minimise the pressure oscillations in the exhaust pipe EP. VN Venturi (Figure 15) A venturi is installed in the dilution tunnel DT to create a negative pressure in the region of the exit of the transfer tube TT. The gas flow rate through TT is determined by the momentum exchange at the venturi zone, and is basically proportional to the flow rate of the pressure blower PB leading to a constant dilution ratio. Since the momentum exchange is 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/121 affected by the temperature at the exit of TT and the pressure difference between EP and DT, the actual dilution ratio is slightly lower at low load than at high load. FC2 Flow controller (Figures 13, 14, 18, 19, optional) A flow controller may be used to control the flow of the pressure blower PB and/or the suction blower SB. It may be connected to the exhaust, intake air, or fuel flow signals and/or to the CO2 or NOx differential signals. When using a pressurised air supply (Figure 18), FC2 directly controls the air flow. FM1 Flow measurement device (Figures 11, 12, 18, 19) Gas meter or other flow instrumentation to measure the dilution air flow. FM1 is optional if the pressure blower PB is calibrated to measure the flow. FM2 Flow measurement device (Figure 19) Gas meter or other flow instrumentation to measure the diluted exhaust gas flow. FM2 is optional if the suction blower SB is calibrated to measure the flow. PB Pressure blower (Figures 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19) To control the dilution air flow rate, PB may be connected to the flow controllers FC1 or FC2. PB is not required when using a butterfly valve. PB may be used to measure the dilution air flow, if calibrated. SB Suction blower (Figures 11, 12, 13, 16, 17, 19) For fractinal sampling systems only. SB may be used to measure the diluted exhaust gas flow, if calibrated. DAF Dilution air filter (Figures 11 to 19) It is recommended that the dilution air be filtered and charcoal scrubbed to eliminate background hydrocarbons. At the engine manufacturer’s request the dilution air shall be sampled according to good engineering practice to determine the background particulate levels, which can then be subtracted from the values measured in the diluted exhaust. DT Dilution tunnel (Figures 11 to 19) The dilution tunnel: — shall be of a sufficient length to cause complete mixing of the exhaust and dilution air under turbulent flow conditions; — shall be constructed of stainless steel with: — thickness/diamter ratio of 0,025 or less for dilution tunnels with inside diameters greater than 75 mm; — a nominal thickness of no less then 1,5 mm for dilution tunnels with inside diameters of equal to or less than 75 mm; — shall be at least 75 mm in diameter for the fractional sampling type; — is recommended to be at least 25 mm in diameter for the total sampling type; — may be heated to no greater than 325 K (52°C) wall temperature by direct heating or by dilution air preheating, provided the air temperature does not exceed 325 K (52°C) prior to the introduction of the exhaust in the dilution tunnel; — may be insulated. The engine exhaust shall be throughly mixed with the dilution air. For fractional sampling systems, the mixing quality shall be checked after introduction into service by means of CO2-profile of the tunnel with the engine running (at least four equally spaced measuring points). If necessary, a mixing orifice may be used. C 173/122 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Note: If the ambient temperature in the vicinity of the dilution tunnel (DT) is below 293K (20°C), precautions should be taken to avoid particle losses onto the cool walls of the dilution tunnel. Therefore, heating and/or insulating the tunnel within the limits given above is recommended. At high engine loads, the tunnel may be cooled by a non-aggressive means such as a circulating fan, as long as the temperature of the cooling medium is not below 293K (20°C). HE Heat exchanger (Figures 16, 17) The heat exchanger shall be of sufficient capacity to maintain the temperature at the inlet to the suction blower SB within 6 11K of the average operating temperature observed during the test. 2. 3. Full flow dilution system A dilution system is described in Figure 20 based upon the dilution of the total exhaust using the CVS (constant volume sampling) concept. The total volume of the mixture of exhaust and dilution air must be measured. Either a PDP or a CFV system may be used. For subsequent collection of the particulates, a sample of the dilute exhaust gas is passed to the particulate sampling system (Section 2. 4, Figures 21 and 22). If this is done directly, it is referred to as single dilution. If the sample is diluted once more in the secondary dilution tunnel, it is referred to as double dilution. This is useful, if the filter face temperature requirement cannot be met with single dilution. Although partly a dilution system, the double dilution system is described as a modification of a particulate sampling system in Section 2. 4, Figure 22, since it shares most of the parts with a typical particulate sampling system. Figure 20 Full flow dilution system to background filter optional optional air exhaust see Figure 21 to particulate sampling system or to DDS see Figure 22 if EFC is used vent vent The total amount of raw exhaust gas is mixed in the dilution tunnel DT with the dilution air. The diluted exhaust gas flow rate is measured either with a positive displacement pump PDP or with a critical flow venturi CFV. A heat exchanger HE or electronic flow compensation EFC may be used for proportional particulate sampling and for flow determination. Since particulate mass determinations is based on the total diluted exhaust gas flow, the dilution ratio is not required to be calculated. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/123 2. 3. 1. Components of Figure 20 EP Exhaust pipe The exhaust pipe length from the exit of the engine exhaust manifold, turbocharger outlet or after-treatment device to the dilution tunnel shall not exceed 10 m. If the exhaust pipe downstream of the engine exhaust manifold, turbocharger outlet or after-treatment device exceeds 4 m in length, then all tubing in excess of 4 m shall be insulated, except for an in-line smokemeter, if used. The radial thickness of the insulation must be at least 25 mm. The thermal conductivity of the insulating material must have a value no greater than 0,1 W/mK measured at 673 K. To reduce the thermal inertia of the exhaust pipe a thickness to diameter ratio of 0,015 or less is recommended. The use of flexible sections shall be limited to a length to diameter ratio of 12 or less. PDP Positive displacement pump The PDP meters total diluted exhaust flow from the number of the pump revolutions and the pump displacement. The exhaust system backpressure must not be artificially lowered by the PDP or dilution air inlet system. Static exhaust backpressure measured with the PDP system operating shall remain within 6 1,5 kPa of the static pressure measured without connection to the PDP at identical engine speed and load. The gas mixture temperature immediately ahead of the PDP shall be within 6 6 K of the average operating temperature observed during the test, when no flow compensation is used. Flow compensation may only be used if the temperature at the inlet to the PDP does not exceed 323K (50°C). CFV Critical flow venturi CFV measures total diluted exhaust flow by maintaining the flow at choked conditions (critical flow). Static exhaust backpressure measured with the CFV system operating shall remain within 6 1,5 kPa of the static pressure measured without connection to the CFV at identical engine speed and load. The gas mixture temperature immediately ahead of the CFV shall be within 6 11 K of the average operating temperature observed during the test, when no flow compensation is used. HE Heat exchanger (optional, if EFC is used) The heat exchanger shall be of sufficient capacity to maintain the temperature within the limits required above. EFC Elektronic flow compensation (optional, if HE is used) If the temperature at the inlet to either the PDP or CFV is not kept within the limits stated above, a flow compensation system is required for continuous measurement of the flow rate and control of the proportional sampling in the particulate system. To that purpose, the continuously measured flow rate signals are used to correct the sample flow rate through the particulate filters of the particulate sampling system (see Section 2. 4, Figures 21, 22), accordingly. DT Dilution tunnel The dilution tunnel: — shall be small enough in diameter to cause turbulent flow (Reynolds number greater than 4 000) and of sufficient length to cause complete mixing of the exhaust and dilution air: a mixing orifice may be used; — shall be at least 460 mm in diameter with a single dilution system; — shall be at least 210 mm in diameter with a double dilution system; — may be insulated. The engine exhaust shall be directed downstream at the point where it is introduced into the dilution tunnel, and throughly mixed. C 173/124 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 When using single dilution, a sample from the dilution tunnel is transferred to the particulate sampling system (Section 2. 4, Figure 21). The flow capacity of the PDP or CFV must be sufficient to maintain the diluted exhaust at a temperature of less than or equal to 325 K (52°C) immediately before the primary particulate filter. When using double dilution, a sample from the dilution tunnel is transferred to the secondary dilution tunnel where it is further diluted, and then passed through the sampling filters (Section 2. 4, Figure 22). The flow capacity of the PDP or CFV must be sufficient to maintain the diluted exhaust stream in the DT at a temperature of less than or equal to 464 K (191°C) at the sampling zone. The secondary dilution system must provide sufficient secondary dilution air to maintain the doubly-diluted exhaust stream at a temperature of less than or equal to 325 K (52°C) immediately before the primary particulate filter. DAF Dilution air filter It is recommended that the dilution air be filtered and charcoal scrubbed to eliminate background hydrocarbons. At the engine manufacturer’s request the dilution air shall be sampled according to good engineering practice to determine the background particulate levels, which can then be subtracted from the values measured in the diluted exhaust. PSP Particulate sampling probe The probe is the leading section of PTT and: — shall be installed facing upstream at a point where the dilution air and exhaust gas are well mixed, i. e. on the dilution tunnel (DT) centreline approximately 10 tunnel diameters downstream of the point where the exhaust enters the dilution tunnel; — shall be of 12 mm minimum inside diameter; — may be heated to no greater than 325 K (52°C) wall temperature by direct heating or by dilution air preheating, provided the air temperature does not exceed 325 K (52°C) prior to the introduction of the exhaust in the dilution tunnel; — may be insulated. 2. 4. Particulate sampling system The particulate sampling system is required for collecting the particulates on the particulate filter. In the case of total sampling partial flow dilution, which consists of passing the entire diluted exhaust sample through the filters, dilution (Section 2. 2, Figures 14, 18) and sampling system usually form an integral unit. In the case of fractional sampling partial flow dilution or full flow dilution, which consists of passing through the filters only a portion of the diluted exhaust, the dilution (Section 2. 2, Figures 11, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17, 19; Section 2. 3. Figure 20) and sampling systems usually form different units. In this Directive, the double dilution system (Figure 22) of a full flow dilution system is considered as a specific modification of a typical particulate sampling system as shown in Figure 21. The double dilution system includes all important parts of the particulate sampling system, like filter holders and sampling pump, and additionally some dilution features, like a dilution air supply and a secondary dilution tunnel. In order to avoid any impact on the control loops, it is recommended that the sample pump be running throughout the complete test procedure. For the single filter method, a by-pass system shall be used for passing the sample through the sampling filters at the desired times. Interference of the switching procedure on the control loops must be minimised. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/125 Figure 21 Particulate sampling system from dilution tunnel DT see Figures 11 to 20 optional from EGA from PDP from CFV from GFUEL or or or A sample of the diluted exhaust gas is taken from the dilution tunnel DT of a partial flow or full flow dilution system through the particulate sampling probe PSP and the particulate transfer tube PTT by means of the sampling pump P. The sample is passed through the filter holder(s) FH that contain the particulate sampling filters. The sample flow rate is controlled by the flow controller FC3. If electronic flow compensation EFC (see Figure 20) is used, the diluted exhaust gas flow is used as command signal for FC3. Figure 22 Double dilution system (full flow system only) vent from dilution tunnel DT see Figure 20 optional PDP or CFV A sample of the diluted exhaust gas is transferred from the dilution tunnel DT of a full dilution system through the particulate sampling probe PSP and the particulate transfer tube PTT to the secondary dilution tunnel SDT, where it is diluted once more. The sample is then passed through the filter holder(s) FH that contain the particulate sampling filters. The dilution air flow rate is usually constant whereas the sample flow rate is controlled by the flow controller FC3. If electronic flow compensation EFC (see Figure 20) is used, the total diluted exhaust gas flow is used as command signal for FC3. C 173/126 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 2. 4. 1. Components of Figures 21 and 22 PTT Particulate transfer tube (Figures 21, 22) The particulate transfer tube must not exceed 1 020 mm in length, and must be minimised in length whenever possible. Where applicable (i. e. for partial flow dilution fractional sampling systems and for full flow dilution systems), the length of the sampling probes (SP, ISP, PSP, respectively, see Sections 2. 2 and 2. 3) shall be included. The dimensions are valid for: — the partial flow dilution fractional sampling type and the full flow single dilution system from the tip of the probe (SP, ISP, PSP, respectively) to the filter holder; — the partial flow dilution total sampling type from the end of the dilution tunnel to the filter holder; — the full flow double dilution system from the tip of the probe (PSP) to the secondary dilution tunnel. The transfer tube: — may be heated to no greater than 325 K (52°C) wall temperature by direct heating or by dilution air preheating, provided the air temperature does not exceed 325 K (52°C) prior to the introduction of the exhaust in the dilution tunnel; — may be insulated. SDT Secondary dilution tunnel (Figure 22) The secondary dilution tunnel should have a minimum diameter of 75 mm, and should be of sufficient length so as to provide a residence time of at least 0,25 seconds for the doubly-diluted sample. The primary filter holder FH shall be located within 300 mm of the exit of the SDT. The secondary dilution tunnel: — may be heated to no greater than 325 K (52°C) wall temperature by direct heating or by dilution air preheating, provided the air temperature does not exceed 325 K (52°C) prior to the introduction of the exhaust in the dilution tunnel; — may be insulated. FH Filter holder(s) (Figures 21, 22) For primary and back-up filters one filter housing or separate filter housings may be used. The requirements of Annex III, Appendix 4, Section 4. 1. 3 shall be met. The filter holder(s): — may be heated to no greater than 325 K (52°C) wall temperature by direct heating or by dilution air preheating, provided the air temperature does not exceed 325 K (52°C) prior to the introduction of the exhaust in the dilution tunnel; — may be insulated. P Sampling pump (Figures 21, 22) The particulate sampling pump shall be located sufficiently distant from the tunnel so that the inlet gas temperature is maintained constant (6 3 K), if low correction by FC3 is not used. DP Dilution air pump (Figure 22) The dilution air pump shall be located so that the secondary dilution air is supplied at a temperature of 298 K 6 5 K (25°C 6 5°C), if the dilution air is not preheated. FC3 Flow controller (Figures 21, 22) A flow controller shall be used to compensate the particulate sample flow rate for temperature and backpressure variations in the sample path, if no other means are available. The flow controller is required if electronic flow compensation EFC (see Figure 20) is used. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/127 FM3 Flow measurement device (Figures 21, 22) The gas meter or flow instrumentation for the particulate sample flow shall be located sufficiently distant from the sampling pump P so that the inlet gas temperature remains constant (6 3 K), if flow correction by FC3 is not used. FM4 Flow measurement device (Figure 22) The gas meter or flow instrumentation for the dilution air flow shall be located so that the inlet gas temperature remains at 298 K 6 5 K (25°C 6 5°C). BV Ball valve (optional) The ball valve shall have an inside diameter not less than the inside diameter of the particulate transfer tube PTT, and a switching time of less than 0,5 seconds. Note: If the ambient temperature in the vicinity of PSP, PTT, SDT, and FH is below 293K (20°C), precautions should be taken to avoid particle losses onto the cool wall of these parts. Therefore, heating and/or insulating these parts within the limits given in the respective descriptions is recommended. It is also recommended that the filter face temperature during sampling be not below 293K (20°C). At high engine loads, the above parts may be cooled by a non-aggressive means such as a circulating fan, as long as the temperature of the cooling medium is not below 293K (20°C). 3. 3. 1. DETERMINATION OF SMOKE Introduction Sections 3. 2 and 3. 3 and Figures 23 and 24 contain detailed descriptions of the recommended opacimeter systems. Since various configurations can produce equivalent results, exact conformance with Figures 23 and 24 is not required. Additional components such as instruments, valves, solenoids, pumps, and switches may be used to provide additional information and coordinate the functions of the component systems. Other components which are not needed to maintain the accuracy on some systems, may be excluded if their exclusion is based upon good engineering judgment. The principle of measurement is that light is transmitted through a specific length of the smoke to be measured and that proportion of the incident light which reaches a receiver is used to assess the light obscuration properties of the medium. The smoke measurement depends upon the design of the apparatus, and may be done in the exhaust pipe (full flow in-line opacimeter), at the end of the exhaust pipe (full flow end-of-line opacimeter) or by taking a sample from the exhaust pipe (partial flow opacimeter). For the determination of the light absorption coefficient from the opacity signal, the optical path length of the instrument shall be supplied by the instrument manufacturer. 3. 2. Full flow opacimeter Two general types of full flow opacimeters may be used (Figure 23). With the in-line opacimeter, the opacity of the full exhaust plume within the exhaust pipe is measured. With this type of opacimeter, the effective optical path length is a function of the opacimeter design. With the end-of-line opacimeter, the opacity of the full exhaust plume is measured as it exits the exhaust pipe. With this type of opacimeter, the effective optical path length is a function of the exhaust pipe design and the distance between the end of the exhaust pipe and the opacimeter. C 173/128 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Figure 23 Full flow opacimeter (optional) 3. 2. 1. Components of Figure 23 EP Exhaust pipe With an in-line opacimeter, there shall be no change in the exhaust pipe diameter within three exhaust pipe diameters before or after the measuring zone. If the diameter of the measuring zone is greater than the diameter of the exhaust pipe, a pipe gradually convergent before the measuring zone is recommended. With an end-of-line opacimeter, the terminal 0,6 m of the exhaust pipe shall be of circular cross-section and be free from elbows and bends. The end of the exhaust pipe shall be cut off squarely. The opacimeter shall be mounted centrally to the plume within 25 6 5 mm of the end of the exhaust pipe. OPL Optical path length The length of the smoke obscured optical path between the opacimeter light source and the receiver, corrected as necessary for non-uniformity due to density gradients and fringe effect. The optical path length shall be submitted by the instrument manufacturer taking into account any measures against sooting (for example, purge air). If the optical path length is not available, it shall be determined in accordance with ISO IDS 11614, Section 11. 6. 5. For the correct determination of the optical path length, a minimum exhaust gas velocity of 20 m/s is required. LS Light source The light source shall be an incandescent lamp with a colour temperature in the range of 2 800 to 3 250 K or a green light emitting diode (LED) with a spectral peak between 550 and 570 nm. The light source shall be protected against sooting by means that do not influence the optical path length beyond the manufacturer’s specifications. LD Light detector The detector shall be a photocell or a photodiode (with a filter, if necessary). In the case of an incandescent light source, the receiver shall have a peak spectral response similar to the phototopic curve of the human eye (maximum response) in the range of 550 to 570 nm, to less than 4 % of that maximum response below 430 nm and above 680 nm. The light detector shall be protected against sooting by means that do not influence the optical path length beyond the manufacturers specifications. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/129 CL Collimating lens The light output shall be collimated to a beam with a maximum diameter of 30 mm. The rays of the light beam shall be parallel within a tolerance of 3° of the optical axis. T1 Temperature sensor (optional) The exhaust gas temperature may be monitored over the test. 3. 3. Partial flow opacimeter With the partial flow opacimeter (Figure 24), a representative exhaust sample is taken from the exhaust pipe and passed through a transfer line to the measuring chamber. With this type of opacimeter, the effective optical path length is a function of the opacimeter design. The response times referred to in the following section apply to the minimum flow rate of the opacimeter, as specified by the instrument manufacturer. Figure 24 Partial flow opacimeter Exhaust (optional) 3. 3. 1. Components of Figure 24 EP Exhaust Pipe The exhaust pipe shall be a straight pipe of at least six pipe diameters upstream and three pipe diameters downstream of the tip of the probe. SP Sampling probe The sampling probe shall be an open tube facing upstream on or about the exhaust pipe centreline. The clearance with the wall of the tailpipe shall be at least 5 mm. The probe diameter shall ensure a representative sampling and a sufficient flow through the opacimeter. TT Transfer tube The transfer tube shall: — be as short as possible and ensure an exhaust gas temperature of 373 6 30 K (100°C 6 30°C) at the entrance to the measuring chamber, — have a wall temperature sufficiently above the dew point of the exhaust gas to prevent condensation, — be equal to the diameter of the sampling probe over the entire length, C 173/130 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 — have a response time of less than 0,05 s at minimum instrument flow, as determined according to Annex III, Appendix 4, Section 5. 2. 4. , — have no significant effect on the smoke peak. FM Flow measurement device Flow instrumentation to detect the correct flow into the measuring chamber. The minimum and maximum flow rates shall be specified by the instrument manufacturer, and shall be such that the response time requirement of TT and the optical path length specifications are met. The flow measurement device may be close to the sampling pump, P, if used. MC Measuring chamber The measuring chamber shall have a non-reflective internal surface, or equivalent optical environment. The impingement of stray light on the detector due to internal reflections of diffusion effects shall be reduced to a minimum. The pressure of the gas in the measuring chamber shall not differ from the atmospheric pressure by more than 0,75 kPa. Where this is not possible by design, the opacimeter reading shall be converted to atmospheric pressure. The wall temperature of the measuring chamber shall be set to within 6 5 K between 343 K (70°C) and 373 K (100°C), but in any case sufficiently above the dew point of the exhaust gas to prevent condensation. The measuring chamber shall be equipped with appropriate devices for measuring the temperature. OPL Optical path length The length of the smoke obscured optical path between the opacimeter light source and the receiver, corrected as necessary for non-uniformity due to density gradients and fringe effect. The optical path length shall be submitted by the instrument manufacturer taking into account any measures against sooting (for example, purge air). If the optical path length is not available, it shall be determined in accordance with ISO IDS 11614, Section 11. 6. 5. LS Light source The light source shall be an incandescent lamp with a colour temperature in the range of 2 800 to 3 250 K or a green light emitting diode (LED) with a spectral peak between 550 and 570 nm. The light source shall be protected against sooting by means that do not influence the optical path length beyond the manufacturer’s specifications. LD Light detector The detector shall be a photocell or a photodiode (with a filter, if necessary). In the case of an incandescent light source, the receiver shall have a peak spectral response similar to the phototopic curve of the human eye (maximum response) in the range of 550 to 570 nm, to less than 4 % of that maximum response below 430 nm and above 680 nm. The light detector shall be protected against sooting by means that do not influence the optical path length beyond the manufacturer’s specifications. CL Collimating lens The light output shall be collimated to a beam with a maximum diameter of 30 mm. The rays of the light beam shall be parallel within a tolerance of 3° of the optical axis. T1 Temperature sensor To monitor the exhaust gas temperature at the entrance to the measuring chamber. P Sampling pump (optional) A sampling pump downstream of the measuring chamber may be used to transfer the sample gas through the measuring chamber. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/131 ANNEX VI EC TYPE-APPROVAL CERTIFICATE Communication concerning the: — type-approval (1) — extension of (engine family/component (1) with regard to Directive 88/77/EEC as last amended by Directive. type-approval (1) of technical unit vehicle/separate a type/engine EC type-approval No. :. Extension-No. :. SECTION I 0. 0. 1. 0. 2. 0. 3. 0. 4. 0. 5. 0. 6. 0. 7. SECTION II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. General Make of vehicle/separate technical unit/component (1):. Manufacturer’s designation of vehicle type/separate technical unit (engine type/engine family)/component (1):. Manufacturer’s type coding as marked on the vehicle/separate technical unit (engine type/engine family)/component (1):. Category of vehicle:. Category of engine: diesel/NG-fuelled/LPG-fuelled (1). Name and address of manufacturer:. Name and address of manufacturer’s authorised representative (if any):. Brief description (where appropriate): See Annex I. Technical department responible for carrying out the tests:. Date of test report:. Number of test report:. Ground(s) for extending type approval (where appropriate):. Remarks (if any): See Annex I. Place:. Date:. Signature:. A list of documents making up the type-approval file lodged with the administrative department that has granted type approval, which may be obtained on request, is attached. (1) Delete as appropriate. C 173/132 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 to EC type approval certificate No. concerning the type approval of a vehicle/separate technical unit/component (1) within the meaning of Directive 97/. /EC Appendix 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 2. 1. 1. 3. 1. 1. 4. 1. 1. 5. 1. 1. 6. 1. 1. 7. 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 1. 3. 1. 3. 1. 1. 3. 2. 1. 3. 3. 1. 3. 4. Brief description Particulars to be completed in relation to the type-approval of a vehicle with an engine installed:. Make of engine (name of undertaking):. Type and commercial description (mention any variants):. Manufacturer’s code as marked on the engine:. Category of vehicle (if applicable):. Category of engine: diesel/NG-fuelled/LPG-fuelled (1). Name and address of manufacturer:. Name and adress of manufacturer’s authorised representative (if any):. If the engine referred to in 1. 1 has been type-approved as a separate technical unit: Type-approval numer of the engine/engine family (1). Particulars to be completed in relation to the type-approval of an engine/engine family (1) as a separate technical unit (conditions to be respected in the installation of the engine on a. vehicle): Maximum and/or minimum intake depression:. kPa Maximum allowable back pressure:. kPa Exhaust system volume:. cm³ Power absorbed by auxiliaries needed for operating the engine: 1. 3. 4. 1. Idle:. kW; Low speed:. kW; High speed:. kW Speed A:. kW; Speed B:. kW; Speed C:. kW; Reference speed:. kW 1. 3. 5. 1. 4. 1. 4. 1. 1. 4. 2. 1. 4. 3. Restrictions of use (if any):. Emission levels of the engine/parent engine (1): ESC-test (if applicable): CO:. g/kWh HC:. g/kWh NOx:. g/kWh PT:. g/kWh ELR-test (if applicable): Smoke value:. m−1 ETC-test (if applicable): CO:. g/kWh HC:. g/kWh (1) NMHC:. g/kWh (1) CH4:. g/kWh (1) NOx:. g/kWh PT:. g/kWh (1) (1) Delete as appropriate. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/133 ANNEX VII EXAMPLE OF CALCULATION PROCEDURE 1. ESC TEST 1. 1. Gaseous emissions The measurement data for the calculation of the individual mode results are shown below. In this example, CO and NOx are measured on a dry basis, HC on a wet basis. The HC concentration is given in propane equivalent (C3) and has to be multiplied by 3 to result in the C1 equivalent. The calculation procedure is identical for the other modes. P (kW) Ta (K) Ha (g/kg) GEXH (kg) GAIRW (kg) GFUEL (kg) HC (ppm) CO (ppm) NO2 (ppm) 82,9 294,8 7,81 563,38 545,29 18,09 6,3 41,2 495 Calculation of the dry to wet correction factor KW,r (Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 4. 2): FFH = 1,969 (1 + 18,09 545,29) = 1,9058 and KW2 = 1,608 * 7,81 1 000 + (1,608 * 7,81) = 0,0124 KW,r =(1 − 1,9058 * 18,09 541,06) − 0,0124 = 0,9239 Calculation of the wet concentrations: CO = 41,2 * 0,9239 = 38,1 ppm NOx = 495 * 0,9239 = 457 ppm Calculation of the NOx humidity correction factor KH,D (Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 4. 3): A = 0,309 * 18,09/541,06 − 0,0266 = − 0,0163 B = − 0,209 * 18,09/541,06 + 0,00954 = 0,0026 KH,D = 1 1 − 0,0163 * (7,81 − 10,71) + 0,0026 * (294,8 − 298) = 0,9625 Calculation of the emission mass flow rates (Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 4. 4): NOx = 0,001587 * 457 * 0,9625 * 563,38 = 393,27 g/h CO = 0,000966 * 38,1 * 563,38 = 20,735 g/h HC = 0,000479 * 6,3 * 3 * 563,38 = 5,100 g/h Calculation of the specific emissions (Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 4. 5): The following example calculation is given for CO; the calculation procedure is identical for the other components. The emission mass flow rates of the individual modes are multiplied by the respective weighting factors, as indicated in Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 2. 7. 1, and summed up to result in the mean emission mass flow rate over the cycle: C 173/134 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 CO = (6,7 * 0,15) + (24,6 * 0,08) + (20,5 * 0,10) + (20,7 *0,10) + (20,6 * 0,05) + (15,0 * 0,05) + (19,7 * 0,05) + (74,5 * 0,09) + (31,5 * 0,10) + (81,9 * 0,08) + (34,8 * 0,05) + (30,8 * 0,05) + (27,3 * 0,05) = 30,91 g/h The engine power of the individual modes is multiplied by the respective weighting factors, as indicated in Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 2. 7. 1, and summed up to result in the mean cycle power: P(n) = (0,1 * 0,15) + (96,8 * 0,08) + (55,2 * 0,10) + (82,9 * 0,10) + (46,8 * 0,05) + (70,1 * 0,05) + (23,0 * 0,05) + (114,3 * 0,09) + (27,0 * 0,10) + (122,0 * 0,08) + (28,6 * 0,05) + (87,4 * 0,05) + (57,9 * 0,05) = 60,006 kW CO = 30,91 60,006 = 0,515 g/kWh Calculation of the specific NOx emission of the random point (Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 4. 6. 1): Assume the following values have been determined on the random point: = 1 600 min−1 = 495 Nm nZ MZ NOx mass. Z = 487,9 g/h (calculated according to the previous formulae) P(n)Z NOx,Z = 83 kW = 487,9/83 = 5,878 g/kWh Determination of the emission value from the test cycle (Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 4. 6. 2): Assume the values of the four enveloping modes on the ESC to be as follows: nRT nSU ER ES ET EU MR MS MT MU 1 368 1 785 5,943 5,565 5,889 4,973 515 460 681 610 ETU = 5,889 + (4,973 − 5,889) * (1 600 − 1 368) / (1 785 − 1 368) = 5,377 g/kWh ERS = 5,943 + (5,565 − 5,943) * (1 600 − 1 368) / (1 785 − 1 368) = 5,732 g/kWh MTU = 681 + (601 − 681) * (1 600 − 1 368) / (1 785 − 1 368) = 641,3 Nm MRS = 515 + (460 − 515) * (1 600 − 1 368) / (1 785 − 1 368) = 484,3 Nm EZ = 5,732 + (5,377 − 5,732) * (495 − 484,3) / (641,3 − 484,3) = 5,708 g/kWh Comparison of the NOx emission values (Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 4. 6. 3): NOx diff = 100 * (5,878 − 5,708) / 5,708 = 2,98 % 1. 2. Particulate emissions Particulate measurement is based on the principle of sampling the particulates over the complete cycle, but determining the sample and flow rates (MSAM and GEDF) during the individual modes. The calculation of GEDF depends on the system used. In the following examples, a system with CO2 measurement and carbon balance method and a system with flow measurement are used. When using a full flow dilution system, GEDF is directly measured by the CVS equipement. Calculation of GEDF (Annex III, Appendix 1, Sections 5. 2. 3 and 5. 2. 4): Assume the following measurement data of mode 4. The calculation procedure is identical for the other modes. GEXH (kg/h) GFUEL (kg/h) GDILW (kg/h) GTOTW (kg/h) CO2D (%) CO2A (%) 334,02 10,76 5,4435 6,0 0,657 0,040 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/135 (a) carbon balance method GEDFW = 206,5 * 10,76 0,657 − 0,040 = 3 601,2 kg/h (b) flow measurement method q = 6,0 (6,0 − 5,4435) = 10,78 GEDFW = 334,02 * 10,78 = 3 600,7 kg/h Calculation of the mass flow rate (Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 5. 4): The GEDFW flow rates of the individual modes are multiplied by the respective weighting factors, as indicated in Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 2. 7. 1, and summed up to result in the mean GEDF over the cycle. The total sample rate MSAM is summed up from the sample rates of the individual modes. GEDFW = + (3 592 * 0,08) + (3 600 * 0,05) + (3 601 * 0,08) + (3 611 * 0,10) + (3 640 * 0,05) + (3 639 * 0,05) + (3 600 * 0,10) (3 614 * 0,09) (3 582 * 0,05) (3 567 * 0,15) + + + (3 635 * 0,05) (3 618 * 0,05) + (3 620 * 0,10) + = 3 604,6 kg/h MSAM = 0,226 + 0,122 + 0,151 + 0,152 + 0,076 + 0,076 + 0,076 + 0,136 + 0,151 + 0,121 + 0,076 + 0,076 + 0,075 = 1,515 kg Assume the particulate mass on the filters to be 2,5 mg, then PTmass = 2,5 1,515 * 3 604,6 1 000 = 5,948 g/h Background correction (optional) Assume one background measurement with the following values. The calculation of the dilution factor DF is identical to Section 3. 1 of this Annex and not shown here. Md = 0,1 mg; MDIL = 1,5 kg Sum of DF = [(1−1/14,75) * 0,10] [(1−1/8,89) * 0,08] + [(1−1/119,15) * 0,15] + + [(1−1/10,10) * 0,10] + [(1−1/18,02) * 0,05] + [(1−1/12,33) * 0,05] + [(1−1/32,18) * 0,05] + [(1−1/6,94) * 0,09] + [(1−1/25,19) * 0,10] + [(1−1/6,12) * 0,08] + [(1−1/20,87) * 0,05] + [(1−1/8,77) * 0,05] + [(1−1/12,59) * 0,05] = 0,923 PTmass = 2,5 1,515 − (0,1 1,5 * 0,923) * 3 604,6 1 000 = 5,726 g/h Calculation of the specific emission (Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 5. 5): P(n) = (0,1 * 0,15) + (96,8 * 0,08) + (55,2 * 0,10) + (82,9 * 0,10) + (46,8 * 0,05) + (70,1 * 0,05) + (23,0 * 0,05) + (114,3 * 0,09) + (27,0 * 0,10) + (122,0 * 0,08) + (28,6 * 0,05) + (87,4 * 0,05) + (57,9 * 0,05) = 60,006 kW PT = 5,948 60,006 = 0,099 g/kWh, if background corrected PT = 5,726 60,006 = 0,095 g/kWh C 173/136 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Calculation of the specific weighting factor (Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 5. 6): Assume the values calculated for mode 4 above, then WFE,i = 0,152 * 3 604,6 1,515 * 3 600,7 = 0,1004 This value is within the required value of 0,10 ± 0,003. 2. ELR TEST Since Bessel filtering is a completely new averaging procedure in European exhaust legislation, an explanation of the Bessel filter, an example of the design of a Bessel algorithm, and an example of the calculation of the final smoke value is given below. The constants of the Bessel algorithm only depend on the design of the opacimeter and the sampling rate of the data acquisition system. It is recommended that the opacimeter manufacturer provide the final Bessel filter constants for different sampling rates and that the customer use these constants for designing the Bessel algorithm and for calculating the smoke values. 2. 1 General remarks on the Bessel filter Due to high frequency distortions, the raw opacity signal usually shows a highly scattered trace. To remove these high frequency distortions a Bessel filter is required to the ELR test. The Bessel filter itself is a recursive, second-order low-pass filter which guarantees the fastest signal rise without overshoot. Assuming a real time raw exhaust plume in the exhaust tube, each opacimeter shows a delayed and differently measured opacity trace. The delay and the magnitude of the measured opacity trace is primarily dependent on the geometry of the measuring chamber of the opacimeter, including the exhaust sample lines, and on the time needed for processing the signal in the electronics of the opacimeter. The values that characterise these two effects are called the physical and the electrical response time which represent an individual filter for each type of opacimeter The goal of applying a Bessel filter is to guarantee a uniform overall filter characteristic of the whole opacimeter system, consiting of: — physical response time of the opacimeter (tp) — electrical response time of the opacimeter (te) — filter response time of the applied Bessel filter (tF) The resulting overall response time of the system tAver is given by: tAver = ˛tF 2 + tp 2 + te 2 and must be equal for all kinds of opacimeters in order to give the same smoke value. Therefore, a Bessel filter has to be created in such a way, that the filter response time (tF) together with the physical (tp) and electrical response time (te) of the individual opacimeter must result in the required overall response time (tAver). Since tp and te are given values for each individual opacimeter, and tAver is defined to be 1,0 s in this Directive, tF can be calculated as follows: tF = ˛tAver 2 − tp 2 − te 2 By definition, the filter response time tF is the rise time of a filtered output signal between 10 and 90 % on a step input singal. Therefore the cut-off frequency of the Bessel filter has to be iterated in such way, that the response time of the Bessel filter fits into the required rise time. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/137 Figure a Traces of a step input signal and the filtered output signal Step input signal Bessel filtered output signal 1,2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 ] - [ l a n g i S 0 – 0,50 0,00 0,50 1,00 Time [s] 1,50 2,00 2,50 In Figure a, the traces of a step input signal and Bessel filtered output singal as well as the response time of the Bessel filter (tF) are shown. C 173/138 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Designing the final Bessel filter algorithm is a multi step process which requires several iteration cycles. The scheme of the iteration procedure is presented below. Characteristics of opacimeter tp, te [s] Regulation tAver [s] Data acquisition system sample rate [Hz] Required overall Bessel filter response time tF Step 1 fc = fcnew Design of Bessel filter algorithm fc, E, K Step 2 Application of Bessel filter on step input Step 3 t(10 %), t(90 %) Calculation of iterated filter response time tFiter = t(90 %)– t(10 %) Step 4 Deviation between tF and tFiter delta = tFiter – tF tF Step 5 Adjustment of cut-off frequency fcnew = fc * (1 + delta) Iteration no Check for iteration criteria ldeltal # 0,01 yes Step 6 Final Bessel filter constants and algorithm Yi =. Step 7 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/139 2. 2. Calculation of the Bessel algorithm In this example a Bessel algorithm is designed in several steps according to the above iteration procedure which is based upon Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 6. 1. For the opacimeter and the data acquisition system, the following characteristics are assumed: — physical response time tp 0,15 s — electrical response time te 0,05 s — overall response time tAver 1,00 s (by definition in this Diretive) — sampling rate 150 Hz Step 1 Required Bessel filter response time tF: tF = ˛12 − (0,152 + 0,052) = 0,987421 s Step 2 Estimation of cut-off frequency and calculation of Bessel constants E. K for first iteration: fc = 3,1415/(10 * 0,987421) = 0,318152 Hz ∆t = 1/150 = 0,006667 s Ω = 1/[tan (3,1415 * 0,006667 * 0,318152)] = 150,076644 E = 1 1 + 150,076644 * ˛3 * 0,618034 + 0,618034 * 150,0766442 = 7,07948 E-5 K = 2 * 7,07948 E-5 * (0,618034 * 150,0766442−1) − 1 = 0,970783 This gives the Bessel algorithm: Yi = Yi − 1 + 7,07948 E-5 * (Si + 2 * Si − 1 + Si − 2 − 4 * Yi–2) + 0,970783 * (Yi–1 − Yi–2) where Si represents the values of the step input signal (either ‘0’ or ‘1’) and Yi represents the filtered values of the output signal. Step 3 Application of Bessel filter on step input: The Bessel filter response time tF is defined as the rise time of the filtered output signal between 10 % and 90 % on a step input signal. For determining the times of 10 % (t10) and 90 % (t90) of the output sinal, a Bessel filter has to be applied to a step input using the above values of fc, E and K. The index numbers, the time and the values of a step input signal and the resulting values of the filtered output sinal for the first and the second iteration are shown in table B. The points adjacent to t10 and t90 are marked in bold numbers. In Table B, first iteration, the 10 % value occurs between index number 30 and 31 and the 90 % value occurs between index number 191 and 192. For the calculation of tF,iter the exact t10 and t90 values are determined by linear interpolation between the adjacent measuring points, as follows: t10 = t90 = tlower + ∆t * (0,1-outlower) / (outupper − outlower) tlower + ∆t * (0,9-outlower) / (outupper − outlower) where outupper and outlower, respectively, are the adjacent points of the Bessel filtered output signal, and tlower is the time of the adjacent time point, as indicated in Table B. t10 = 0,200000 + 0,006667 * (0,1 − 0,099208) / (0,104794 − 0,099208) = 0,200945 s t90 = 1,273333 + 0,006667 * (0,9 − 0,899147) / (0,901168 − 0,899147) = 1,276147 s Step 4 Filter response time of first iteration cycle: tF,iter = 1,276147 − 0,200945 = 1,075202 s C 173/140 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Step 5 Deviation between required and obtained filter response time of first iteration cycle: ∆ = (1,075202 − 0,987421) / 0,987421 = 0,081641 Step 6 Checking the iteration criteria: x∆x < 0,01 is required. Since 0,081641. 0,01, the iteration criteria is not met and a further iteration cycle has to be started. For this iteration cycle, a new cut-off frequency is calculated from fc and ∆ as follows: fc,new = 0,318152 * (1 + 0,081641) = 0,344126 Hz This new cut-off frequency is used in the second iteraton cycle, starting at Step 2 again. The iteration has to be repeated until the iteration criteria is met. The resulting values of the first and second iteration are summarised in table A. Table A Values of the first and second iteration Parameter (Hz) 1. Iteration 0,318152 2. Iteration 0,344126 fc E K t10 t90 tF,iter ∆ (−) (−) (s) (s) (s) (−) 7,07948 E-5 8,272777 E-5 0,970783 0,200945 1,276147 1,075202 0,081641 0,344126 0,968410 0,185523 1,179562 0,994039 0,006657 0,346417 fc,new (Hz) Step 7 Final Bessel algorithm: As soon as the iteration criteria has been met, the final Bessel filter constants and the final Bessel algorithm are calculated according to Step 2. In this example, the iteration criteria has been met after the second iteration (∆ = 0,006657 # 0,01). The final algorithm is then used for determining the averaged smoke values (see next Section 2. 3). Yi = Yi − 1 + 8,272777 E-5 * (Si + 2 * Si–1 + Si–2−4 * Yi−2) + 0,968410 * (Yi − 1−Yi − 2) 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/141 Values of step input signal and Bessel filtered output signal for the first and second iteration cycle Table B Index i [-] Time [s] Step input signal Si [-] Filtered output signal Yi [-] 1. Iteration 2. Iteration − 2 − 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 − 0,013333 − 0,006667 0,000000 0,006667 0,013333 0,020000 0,026667 0,033333 0,160000 0,166667 0,173333 0,180000 0,186667 0,193333 0,200000 0,206667 0,213333 0,220000 0,226667 0,233333 0,240000 0,246667 1,166667 1,173333 1,180000 1,186667 1,193333 1,200000 1,206667 1,213333 1,220000 1,226667 1,233333 1,240000 1,246667 1,253333 1,260000 1,266667 1,273333 1,280000 1,286667 1,293333 1,300000 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0,000000 0,000000 0,000071 0,000352 0,000908 0,001731 0,002813 0,004145 0,067877 0,072816 0,077874 0,083047 0,088331 0,093719 0,099208 0,104794 0,110471 0,116236 0,122085 0,128013 0,134016 0,140091 0,862416 0,864968 0,867484 0,869964 0,872410 0,874821 0,877197 0,879540 0,881849 0,884125 0,886367 0,888577 0,890755 0,892900 0,895014 0,897096 0,899147 0,901168 0,903158 0,905117 0,907047 0,000000 0,000000 0,000083 0,000411 0,001060 0,002019 0,003278 0,004828 0,077876 0,083476 0,089205 0,095056 0,101024 0,107102 0,113286 0,119570 0,125949 0,132418 0,138972 0,145605 0,152314 0,159094 0,895701 0,897941 0,900145 0,902312 0,904445 0,906542 0,908605 0,910633 0,912628 0,914589 0,916517 0,918412 0,920276 0,922107 0,923907 0,925676 0,927414 0,929121 0,930799 0,932448 0,934067 C 173/142 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 2. 3. Calculation of the smoke values In the scheme below the general procedure of determining the final smoke value is presented. Speed A Load step 1 Speed B Load step 1 Speed C Load step 1 Speed A Load step 2 Speed B Load step 2 Speed C Load step 2 Speed A Load step 3 Speed B Load step 3 Speed C Load step 3 Raw opacity values N [%] Conversion to light absorption coefficient [1/m] k = – (1/LA) * ln(1– N/100) Filtering with Bessel filter Selection of maximum k-value (peak) for each speed and load step Ymax1A Ymax2A Ymax3A Ymax1B Ymax2B Ymax3B Ymax1C Ymax2C Ymax3C Cycle validation for each speed Calculation of mean smoke value for each speed SVA = (Ymax1A + Ymax2A + Ymax 3A)/3 SVB = (Ymax1B + Ymax2B + Ymax 3B)/3 SVC = (Ymax1C + Ymax2C + Ymax 3C)/3 Calculation of the final smoke value SV = 0,43 * SVA + 0,56 * SVB + 0,01 * SVC 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/143 In Figure b, the traces of the measured raw opacity signal, and of the unfiltered and filtered light absorption coefficients (k-value) of the first load step of an ELR test are shown, and the maximum value Ymax1,A (peak) of the filtered k trace is indicated. Correspondingly, Table C contains the numerical values of index i, time (sampling rate of 150 Hz), raw opacity, unfiltered k and filtered k. Filtering was conducted using the constants of the Bessel algorithm designed in Section 2. 2 of this annex. Due to the large amount of data, only those sections of the smoke trace around the beginning and the peak are tabled. Traces of measured opacity N, of unfiltered smoke k and of filtered smoke k Figure b 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 ] % [ N y t i c a p O Peak = 0,5424 m –1 Opacity N Unfiltered smoke k Filtered smoke k 1,00 0,80 0,60 0,40 0,20 0,00 ] m / 1 [ k e k o m S 0,0 1,0 2,0 3,0 4,0 5,0 6,0 Time [s] 7,0 8,0 9,0 10,0 11,0 The peak value (i = 272) is calculated assuming the following data of Table C. All other individual smoke values are calculated in the same way. For starting the algorithm, S−1, S−2, Y−1 and Y−2 are set to zero. LA (m) Index i 0,430 272 N (%) 16,783 S271 (m−1) 0,427392 S270 (m−1) 0,427532 Y271 (m−1) 0,542383 Y270 (m−1) 0,542337 Calculation of the k-value (Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 6. 3. 1): k = − 1 0,430 * ln (1 − 16,783 100 ) = 0,427252 m−1 This value corresponds to S272 in the following equation. Calculation of Bessel averaged smoke (Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 6. 3. 2): In the following equation, the Bessel constants of the previous Section 2. 2 are used. The actual unfiltered k-value, as calculated above, corresponds to S272 (Si). S271 (Si−1) and S270 (Si−2) are the two preceding unfiltered k-values, Y271 (Yi−1) and Y270 (Yi−2) are the two preceding filtered k-values. C 173/144 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Y272 = 0,542383 + 8,272777 E-5 * (0,427252 + 2 * 0,427392 + 0,427532 − 4 * 0,542337) + 0,968410 * (0,542383 − 0,542337) = 0,542389 m−1 This value corresponds to Ymax1,A in the following equation. Calculation of the final smoke value (Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 6. 3. 3): From each smoke trace, the maximum filtered k-value is taken for the further calculation. Assume the following values Speed A B C Cycle 1 0,5424 0,5596 0,4912 Xmax (m−1) Cycle 2 0,5435 0,5400 0,5207 Cycle 3 0,5587 0,5389 0,5177 SVA = (0,5424 + 0,5435 + 0,5587) / 3 = 0,5482 m−1 SVB = (0,5596 + 0,5400 + 0,5389) / 3 = 0,5462 m−1 SVC = (0,4912 + 0,5207 + 0,5177) / 3 = 0,5099 m−1 SV = (0,43 * 0,5482) + (0,56 * 0,5462) + (0,01 * 0,5099) = 0,5467 m−1 Cycle validation (Annex III, Appendix 1, Section 3. 4) Before calculating SV, the cycle must be validated by calculating the relative standard deviations of the smoke of the three cycles for each speed. Speed Mean SV (m−1) Absolute standard deviation (m−1) Relative standard deviation (%) A B C 0,5482 0,5462 0,5099 0,0091 0,0116 0,0162 1,7 2,1 3,2 In this example, the validation criteria of 15 % is met for each speed. 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/145 Values of opacity N, unfiltered and filtered k-value at beginning of load step Table C Index i [-] − 2 − 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Timpe [s] 0,000000 0,000000 0,000000 0,006667 0,013333 0,020000 0,026667 0,033333 0,040000 0,046667 0,053333 0,060000 0,066667 0,073333 0,080000 0,086667 0,093333 0,100000 0,106667 0,113333 0,120000 0,126667 0,133333 0,140000 0,146667 0,153333 0,160000 0,166667 0,173333 0,180000 0,186667 0,193333 0,200000 0,206667 0,213333 0,220000 0,226667 0,233333 0,240000 0,246667 0,253333 0,260000 0,266667 Opacity N [%] 0,000000 0,000000 0,000000 0,020000 0,020000 0,020000 0,020000 0,020000 0,020000 0,020000 0,020000 0,020000 0,020000 0,020000 0,020000 0,020000 0,020000 0,192000 0,212000 0,212000 0,212000 0,343000 0,566000 0,889000 0,929000 0,929000 1,263000 1,455000 1,697000 2,030000 2,081000 2,081000 2,424000 2,475000 2,475000 2,808000 3,010000 3,253000 3,606000 3,960000 4,455000 4,818000 5,020000 Unfiltered k-value [m−1] Filtered k-value [m−1] 0,000000 0,000000 0,000000 0,000465 0,000465 0,000465 0,000465 0,000465 0,000465 0,000465 0,000465 0,000465 0,000465 0,000465 0,000465 0,000465 0,000465 0,004469 0,004935 0,004935 0,004935 0,007990 0,013200 0,020767 0,021706 0,021706 0,029559 0,034086 0,039804 0,047695 0,048906 0,048906 0,057067 0,058282 0,058282 0,066237 0,071075 0,076909 0,085410 0,093966 0,105983 0,114836 0,119776 0,000000 0,000000 0,000000 0,000000 0,000000 0,000000 0,000001 0,000002 0,000002 0,000003 0,000004 0,000005 0,000006 0,000008 0,000009 0,000011 0,000012 0,000014 0,000018 0,000022 0,000028 0,000036 0,000047 0,000061 0,000082 0,000109 0,000143 0,000185 0,000237 0,000301 0,000378 0,000469 0,000573 0,000693 0,000827 0,000977 0,001144 0,001328 0,001533 0,001758 0,002007 0,002283 0,002587 C 173/146 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 Values of opacity N, unfiltered and filtered k-value around Ymaxl,A (; peak value, indicated in bold number) Index i [-] 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 Timpe [s] 1,726667 1,733333 1,740000 1,746667 1,753333 1,760000 1,766667 1,773333 1,780000 1,786667 1,793333 1,800000 1,806667 1,813333 1,820000 1,826667 1,833333 1,840000 1,846667 1,853333 1,860000 1,866667 1,873333 1,880000 1,886667 1,893333 1,900000 1,906667 1,913333 1,920000 1,926667 1,933333 1,940000 1,946667 1,953333 1,960000 1,966667 1,973333 1,980000 1,986667 1,993333 2,000000 Opacity N [%] Unfiltered k-value [m−1] Filtered k-value [m−1] 17,182000 16,949000 16,788000 16,798000 16,788000 16,798000 16,798000 16,788000 16,788000 16,798000 16,798000 16,793000 16,788000 16,783000 16,780000 16,798000 16,778000 16,808000 16,768000 16,010000 16,010000 16,000000 16,010000 16,000000 16,010000 16,394000 16,394000 16,404000 16,394000 16,394000 16,384000 16,010000 16,010000 16,000000 16,010000 16,212000 16,394000 16,394000 16,192000 16,000000 16,000000 16,000000 0,438429 0,431896 0,427392 0,427671 0,427392 0,427671 0,427671 0,427392 0,427392 0,427671 0,427671 0,427532 0,427392 0,427252 0,427168 0,427671 0,427112 0,427951 0,426833 0,405750 0,405750 0,405473 0,405750 0,405473 0,405750 0,416406 0,416406 0,416685 0,416406 0,416406 0,416128 0,405750 0,405750 0,405473 0,405750 0,411349 0,416406 0,416406 0,410794 0,405473 0,405473 0,405473 0,538856 0,539423 0,539936 0,540396 0,540805 0,541163 0,541473 0,541735 0,541951 0,542123 0,542251 0,542337 0,542383 0,542389 0,542357 0,542288 0,542183 0,542043 0,541870 0,541662 0,541418 0,541136 0,540819 0,540466 0,540080 0,539663 0,539216 0,538744 0,538245 0,537722 0,537175 0,536604 0,536009 0,535389 0,534745 0,534079 0,533394 0,532691 0,531971 0,531233 0,530477 0,529704 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/147 3. ETC TEST 3. 1. Gaseous emissions (diesel engine) Assume the following the results for a PDP-CVS system V0 (m³/rev) Np (rev) pB (kPa) p1 (kPa) T (K) Ha (g/kg) NOx conce (ppm) NOx concd (ppm) COconce (ppm) COconcd (ppm) HCconce (ppm) HCconcd (ppm) CO2,conce (%) Wact (kWh) 0,1776 23073 98,0 2,3 322,5 12,8 53,7 0,4 38,9 1,0 9,00 3,02 0,723 62,72 Calculation of the diluted exhaust gas flow (Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 4. 1): MTOTW = 1,293 * 0,1776 * 23073 * (98,0 − 2,3) * 273 / (101,3 * 322,5) = 4237,2 kg Calculation of the NOx correction factor (Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 4. 2): KH, D = 1 1 − 0,0182 * (12,8 − 10,71) = 1,039 Calculation of the background corrected concentrations (Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 4. 3. 1. 1): Assuming a diesel fuel of the composition C1H1,8 FS = 100 * 1 1 + (1,8 / 2) + (3,76 * (1 + (1,8 / 4))) = 13,6 DF = 13,6 0,723 + (9,00 + 38,9) * 10−4 = 18,69 NOx conc = 53,7 − 0,4 * (1 − (1/18,69)) = 53,3 ppm COconc = 38,9 − 1,0 * (1 − (1/18,69)) = 37,9 ppm HCconc 9,00 − 3,02 * (1 − (1/18,69)) = 6,14 ppm = Calculation of the emissions mass flow (Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 4. 3. 1): NOx mass = 0,001587 * 53,3 * 1,039 * 4237,2 = 372,391 g COmass = 0,000966 * 37,9 * 4237,2 = 155,129 g HCmass = 0,000479 * 6,14 * 4237,2 = 12,462 g Calculation of the specific emissions (Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 4. 4): NOx = 372,391 / 62,72 = 5,94 g/kWh CO = 155,129 / 62,72 = 2,47 g/kWh HC = 12,462 / 62,72 = 0,199 g/kWh C 173/148 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 3. 2. Particulate emissions (diesel engine) Assume the following the results for a PDP-CVS system with double dilution MTOTW (kg) 4237,2 Mf,p (mg) Mf,b (mg) MTOT (kg) MSEC (kg) Md (mg) MDIL (kg) DF Wact (kWh) 3,030 0,044 2,159 0,909 0,341 1,245 18,69 62,72 Calculation of the mass emission (Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 5. 1): Mf = 3,030 + 0,044 MSAM = 2,159 − 0,909 = 3,074 mg = 1,250 kg PTmass = 3,074 1,250 * 4237,2 1000 = 10,42 g Calculation of the background corrected mass emission (Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 5. 1): PTmass = [3,074 1,250 − (0,341 1,245 * (1 − 1 18,69))] * 4237,2 1000 = 9,32 g Calculation of the specific emission (Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 5. 2): PT = 10,42 / 62,72 = 0,166 g/kWh PT = 9,32 / 62,72 = 0,149 g/kWh, if background corrected 3. 3. Gaseous emissions (CNG engine) Assume the following test results for a PDP-CVS system with double dilution MTOTW (kg) Ha (g/kg) NOx conce (ppm) NOx concd (ppm) COconce (ppm) COconcd (ppm) HCconce (ppm) HCconcd (ppm) CH4 conce (ppm) CH4 concd (ppm) CO2,conce (%) Wact (kWh) 4237,2 12,8 17,2 0,4 44,3 1,0 27,0 3,02 18,0 1,7 0,723 62,72 Calculation of the NOx, correction factor (Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 4. 2): KH,G = 1 1 − 0,0329 * (12,8 − 10,71) = 1,074 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/149 Calculation of the NMHC concentration (Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 4. 3. 1): a) GC method NMHCconce = 27,0 − 18,0 = 9,0 ppm b) NMC method Assuming a methane efficiency of 0,04 and an ethane efficiency of 0,98 (see Annex III, Appendix 5, Section 1. 8. 4) NMHCconce = 27,0 * (1 − 0,04) − 18,0 0,98 − 0,04 = 8,4 ppm Calculation of the background corrected concentrations (Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 4. 3. 1. 1): Assuming a G20 reference fuel (100 % methane) of the composition C1H4: FS = 100 * 1 1 + (4 / 2) + (3,76 * (1 + (1 + 4 / 4))) = 9,5 DF = 9,5 0,723 + (27,0 + 44,3) * 10−4 = 13,01 For NMHC, the background concentration is the difference between HCconcd and CH4 concd NOx conc COconc NMHCconc = CH4 conc = 17,2 − 0,4 * (1 − (1/13,01)) = 16,8 ppm = 44,3 − 1,0 * (1 − (1/13,01)) = 43,4 ppm 8,4 − 1,32 * (1 − (1/13,01)) = 7,2 ppm = 18,0 − 1,7 * (1 − (1/13,01)) = 16,4 ppm Calculation of the emissions mass flow (Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 4. 3. 1): = 0,001587 * 16,8 * 1,074 * 4237,2 = 121,330 g NOx mass COmass NMHCmass = 0,000502 * 7,2 * 4237,2 CH4 mass = 0,000554 * 16,4 * 4237,2 = 0,000966 * 43,4 * 4237,2 = 177,642 g = 15,315 g = 38,498 g Calculation of the specific emissions (Annex III, Appendix 2, Section 4. 4): NOx CO = 121,330/62,72 = 1,93 g/kWh = 177,642/62,72 = 2,83 g/kWh NMHC CH4 = = 15,315/62,72 = 0,244 g/kWh 38,498/62,72 = 0,614 g/kWH λ — SHIFT FACTOR (Sλ) Calculation of the λ-shift factor (Sλ) (1) 4. 4. 1. Sλ = 2 (1 − inert% 100 )(n + m 4 ) − O2 * 100 where: Sλ inert% O2* n and m = λ-shift factor; = % by volume of inert gases in the fuel (i. e. N2, CO2, He, etc. ); = % by volume of original oxygen in the fuel; = refer to average CnHm representing the fuel hydrocarbons, i. e: (1) Stoichiometric air/fuel ratios of automotive fuels — SAE J1829, June 1987, John B. Heywood, Internal combustion engine fundamentals, McGraw-Hill, 1988, Chapter 3. 4 ‘Combustion stoichiometry’ (pages 68—72). C 173/150 EN Official Journal of the European Communities 8. 6. 98 1 ×[CH4% 100 ]+ 2 ×[C2% 100]+ 3 ×[C3% 100]+ 4 ×[C4% 100]+ 5 ×[C5% 100]+. 1 − diluent% 100 n = 4 ×[CH4% 100 ]+ 4 ×[C2H4% 100 ]+ 6 ×[C2H6% 100 ]+. 8 ×[C3H8% 100 ]+. m = 1 − diluent% 100 where: CH4 = % by volume of methane in the fuel; C2 C3 C4 C5 = % by volume of all C2 hydrocarbons (e. g. : C2H6, C2H4, etc. ) in the fuel; = % by volume of all C3 hydrocarbons (e. g. : C3H8, C3H6, etc. ) in the fuel; = % by volume of all C4 hydrocarbons (e. g. : C4H10, C4H8, etc. ) in the fuel; = % by volume of all C5 hydrocarbons (e. g. : C5H12, C5H10, etc. ) in the fuel; diluent = % by volume of dilution gases in the fuel (i. e. : O2*, N2, CO2, He, etc. ). 4. 2. Examples for the calculation of the λ-shift factor Sλ: Example 1: G25: CH4 = 86 %, N2 = 14 % (by volume) 1 ×[CH4% 100 ]+ 2 ×[C2% 100]+. n = 1 − diluent% 100 = 1 × 0,86 1 − 14 100 = 0,86 0,86 = 1 4 ×[CH4% 100 ]+ 4 ×[C2H4% 100 ]+. m = 1 − diluent% 100 2 (1 − inert% 100 )(n + m 4 ) − O2 * 100 Sλ = = 4 × 0,86 0,86 = 4 = 2 (1 − 14 100) ×(n + 4 4) = 1,16 Example 2: Gxy: CH4 = 87 %, C2H6 = 13 % (by volume) 1 ×[CH4% 100 ]+ 2 ×[C2% 100]+. n = 1 − diluent% 100 1 × 0,87 + 2 × 0,13 = 1 − 0 100 = 1,13 1 = 1,13 4 ×[CH4% 100 ]+ 6 ×[C2H6% 100 ]+. m = 1 − diluent% 100 = 4 × 0,87 + 6 × 0,13 1 = 4,26 8. 6. 98 EN Official Journal of the European Communities C 173/151 Sλ = 2 (1 − inert% 100 )(n + m 4 ) − O2 * 100 = 2 (1 − 0 100) ×(1,13 + 4,26 4 ) = 0,911 Example 3: USA: CH4 = 89 %, C2H6 = 4,5 %, C3H8 = 2,3 %, C6H14 = 0,2 %, O2 = 0,6 %, N2 = 4 % 1 ×[CH4% 100 ]+ 2 ×[C2% 100]+. n = 1 × 0,89 + 2 × 0,045 + 3 × 0,023 + 4 × 0,002 = = 1,11 1 − diluent% 100 1 − (0,64 + 4) 100 m = = Sλ = 4 ×[CH4% 100 ]+ 4 ×[C2H4% 100 ]+ 6 ×[C2H6% 100 ]+. 8 ×[C3H8% 100 ]+. = 1 − diluent% 100 4 × 0,89 + 4 × 0,045 + 8 × 0,023 + 14 × 0,002 1 − 0. 6 + 4 100 2 (1 − inert% 100 )(n + m 4 ) − O2 * 100 = = 4,24 2 (1 − 4 100) ×(1,11 + 4,24 4 ) − 0. 6 100 = 0,96